removed trailing whitespace in Doxygen files
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@52634 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
@@ -47,21 +47,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds an artist name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetArtists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddArtist(const wxString& artist);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a developer name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDevelopers()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddDeveloper(const wxString& developer);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a documentation writer name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDocWriters()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddDocWriter(const wxString& docwriter);
|
||||
@@ -72,14 +72,14 @@ public:
|
||||
translation of the string @c translator-credits from the currently used message
|
||||
catalog -- this can be used to show just the name of the translator of the
|
||||
program in the current language.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTranslators()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddTranslator(const wxString& translator);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the the list of artists to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddArtist()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetArtists(const wxArrayString& artists);
|
||||
@@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the list of developers of the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddDeveloper()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDevelopers(const wxArrayString& developers);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the list of documentation writers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddDocWriter()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDocWriters(const wxArrayString& docwriters);
|
||||
|
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the accelerator entry parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
A combination of the wxAcceleratorEntryFlags values, which
|
||||
indicates which modifier keys are held down.
|
||||
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes the accelerator table from an array of wxAcceleratorEntry.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Number of accelerator entries.
|
||||
@param entries
|
||||
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the accelerator table from a Windows resource (Windows only).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param resource
|
||||
Name of a Windows accelerator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_refcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param accel
|
||||
Accelerator table to assign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a status value and object id to indicate whether the given point
|
||||
was on this or a child object. Can return either a child object, or an
|
||||
was on this or a child object. Can return either a child object, or an
|
||||
integer representing the child element, starting from 1.
|
||||
|
||||
@a pt is in screen coordinates.
|
||||
|
@@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the control with the given @a anim animation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
After control creation you must explicitely call Play() to start to play
|
||||
the animation. Until that function won't be called, the first frame
|
||||
of the animation is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window, must be non-@NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The window style, see wxAC_* flags.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from a file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The name of the file to load.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from the given stream.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The stream to use to load the animation.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_GIF: loads an animated GIF file;
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANI: load an ANI file;
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANY: tries to autodetect the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Load(wxInputStream& stream,
|
||||
@@ -251,13 +251,13 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from a file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
A filename.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
One of the wxAnimationType values; wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANY
|
||||
means that the function should try to autodetect the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LoadFile(const wxString& name,
|
||||
|
@@ -48,14 +48,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxLog class for the application to use for logging errors.
|
||||
The default implementation returns a new wxLogGui class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxLog
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxLog* CreateLogTarget();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the wxAppTraits object when GetTraits() needs it for the first time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxAppTraits
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxAppTraits* CreateTraits();
|
||||
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ public:
|
||||
while (app.Pending())
|
||||
Dispatch();
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Pending()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Dispatch();
|
||||
@@ -92,24 +92,24 @@ public:
|
||||
int FilterEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the user-readable application name.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the user-readable application name.
|
||||
|
||||
The difference between this string and the one returned by GetAppName() is that
|
||||
this one is meant to be shown to the user and so should be used for the window
|
||||
titles, page headers and so on while the other one should be only used internally,
|
||||
e.g. for the file names or configuration file keys.
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetAppName().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppDisplayName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the application name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks wxWidgets sets this to a reasonable default before calling
|
||||
OnInit(), but the application can reset it at will.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppDisplayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppName() const;
|
||||
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the class name of the application. The class name may be used in a
|
||||
platform specific manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetClassName() const;
|
||||
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will exit when the top-level window is
|
||||
deleted, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_app_shutdown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetExitOnFrameDelete() const;
|
||||
@@ -133,18 +133,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the one and only global application object.
|
||||
Usually ::wxTheApp is usead instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetInstance()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxAppConsole* GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the top window hasn't been set using SetTopWindow(),
|
||||
this function will find the first top-level window
|
||||
(frame or dialog) and return that.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTopWindow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetTopWindow() const;
|
||||
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
|
||||
different visuals, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUseBestVisual()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUseBestVisual() const;
|
||||
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ public:
|
||||
configuration file keys.
|
||||
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetVendorName().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVendorDisplayName() const;
|
||||
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application is active, i.e. if one of its windows is
|
||||
currently in the foreground.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If this function returns @false and you need to attract users attention to
|
||||
the application, you may use wxTopLevelWindow::RequestUserAttention to do it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called by wxWidgets on creation of the application. Override this if you wish
|
||||
to provide your own (environment-dependent) main loop.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns 0 under X, and the wParam of the WM_QUIT message under
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ public:
|
||||
asserts are not left in the release code at all.
|
||||
The base class version shows the default assert failure dialog box proposing to
|
||||
the user to stop the program, continue or ignore all subsequent asserts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param file
|
||||
the name of the source file where the assert occurred
|
||||
@param line
|
||||
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return
|
||||
@false from OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineError(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return
|
||||
@false from OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineHelp(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
@@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
processing of the standard command line options.
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return @false from
|
||||
OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineParsed(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Generally speaking, this function should only show a message to the user and
|
||||
return. You may attempt to save unsaved data but this is not guaranteed to
|
||||
work and, in fact, probably won't.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxHandleFatalExceptions()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnFatalException();
|
||||
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dispatch()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Pending();
|
||||
@@ -420,9 +420,9 @@ public:
|
||||
The function returns @true if the message was processed, @false otherwise.
|
||||
If you use wxWidgets with another class library with its own message loop,
|
||||
you should make sure that this function is called to allow wxWidgets to
|
||||
receive messages. For example, to allow co-existence with the Microsoft
|
||||
receive messages. For example, to allow co-existence with the Microsoft
|
||||
Foundation Classes, override the PreTranslateMessage function:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
// Provide wxWidgets message loop compatibility
|
||||
BOOL CTheApp::PreTranslateMessage(MSG *msg)
|
||||
@@ -440,11 +440,11 @@ public:
|
||||
Sends idle events to a window and its children.
|
||||
Please note that this function is internal to wxWidgets and shouldn't be used
|
||||
by user code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks These functions poll the top-level windows, and their children,
|
||||
for idle event processing. If @true is returned, more OnIdle
|
||||
processing is requested by one or more window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxIdleEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SendIdleEvents(wxWindow* win, wxIdleEvent& event);
|
||||
@@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ public:
|
||||
SetAppDisplayName() is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
By default the application name is set to the name of its executable file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAppName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the class name of the application. This may be used in a platform specific
|
||||
manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClassName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@@ -479,11 +479,11 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the application will exit when the
|
||||
top-level frame is deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame
|
||||
is deleted. If @false, the application will continue to run.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_app_shutdown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExitOnFrameDelete(bool flag);
|
||||
@@ -491,10 +491,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Allows external code to modify global ::wxTheApp, but you should really
|
||||
know what you're doing if you call it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param app
|
||||
Replacement for the global application object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetInstance()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetInstance(wxAppConsole* app);
|
||||
@@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Currently implemented for wxGTK2-only.
|
||||
Return @true if theme was successfully changed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param theme
|
||||
The name of the new theme or an absolute path to a gtkrc-theme-file
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -517,10 +517,10 @@ public:
|
||||
can use a specific window as the top window. If no top window is specified by the
|
||||
application, wxWidgets just uses the first frame or dialog in its top-level window
|
||||
list, when it needs to use the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param window
|
||||
The new top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTopWindow(), OnInit()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTopWindow(wxWindow* window);
|
||||
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that this function has to be called in the constructor of the wxApp
|
||||
instance and won't have any effect when called later on.
|
||||
This function currently only has effect under GTK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true, the app will use the best visual.
|
||||
@param forceTrueColour
|
||||
@@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the name of application's vendor. The name will be used
|
||||
in registry access. A default name is set by wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetVendorName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetVendorName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ int wxEntry(int& argc, wxChar** argv);
|
||||
// OnExit isn't called by CleanUp so must be called explicitly.
|
||||
wxTheApp->OnExit();
|
||||
wxApp::CleanUp();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
return CWinApp::ExitInstance();
|
||||
}
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
The names of directory entries are returned without any trailing path
|
||||
separator. This gives a canonical name that can be used in comparisons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_archive_byname
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetInternalName() const;
|
||||
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ enum wxStreamProtocolType
|
||||
wxArchiveClassFactory::Find can also search for a factory by MIME type
|
||||
or wxFileSystem protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
The available factories can be enumerated using
|
||||
The available factories can be enumerated using
|
||||
wxArchiveClassFactory::GetFirst() and wxArchiveClassFactory::GetNext().
|
||||
|
||||
@library{wxbase}
|
||||
@@ -381,13 +381,13 @@ public:
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxString list;
|
||||
const wxArchiveClassFactory *factory = wxArchiveClassFactory::GetFirst();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
while (factory) {
|
||||
list << factory->GetProtocol() << _T("\n");
|
||||
factory = factory->GetNext();
|
||||
}
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFirst() and GetNext() return a pointer to a factory or @NULL if no more
|
||||
are available. They do not give away ownership of the factory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxString list;
|
||||
const wxChar *const *p;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
for (p = factory->GetProtocols(wxSTREAM_FILEEXT); *p; p++)
|
||||
list << *p << _T("\n");
|
||||
@encode
|
||||
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
The first template parameter should be the type of archive input stream
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveInputStream) and the second can either be a pointer to an entry
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveEntry*), or a string/pointer pair (e.g. std::pairwxString,
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveEntry*), or a string/pointer pair (e.g. std::pairwxString,
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry*).
|
||||
|
||||
The @c wx/archive.h header defines the following typedefs:
|
||||
|
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Empties the array: after a call to this function GetCount() will return 0.
|
||||
However, this function does not free the memory used by the array and so
|
||||
However, this function does not free the memory used by the array and so
|
||||
should be used when the array is going to be reused for storing other strings.
|
||||
Otherwise, you should use Clear() to empty the array and free memory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@code
|
||||
Insert("foo", 0);
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If @a nIndex is equal to @e GetCount() this function behaves as Add().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Insert(const wxString& str, size_t nIndex,
|
||||
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified @a compareFunction for item comparison.
|
||||
@e CompareFunction is defined as a function taking two @e const wxString
|
||||
parameters and returning an @e int value less than, equal to or greater
|
||||
parameters and returning an @e int value less than, equal to or greater
|
||||
than 0 if the first string is less than, equal to or greater than the
|
||||
second one.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -219,16 +219,16 @@ public:
|
||||
{
|
||||
return first.length() - second.length();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArrayString array;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
array.Add("one");
|
||||
array.Add("two");
|
||||
array.Add("three");
|
||||
array.Add("four");
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
array.Sort(CompareStringLen);
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@copydoc wxArrayString::Index()
|
||||
|
||||
This function uses binary search for wxSortedArrayString, but it ignores
|
||||
This function uses binary search for wxSortedArrayString, but it ignores
|
||||
the @a bCase and @a bFromEnd parameters.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Index(const wxString& sz, bool bCase = true,
|
||||
|
@@ -132,14 +132,14 @@
|
||||
Client is the entity that calls wxArtProvider's GetBitmap or GetIcon function.
|
||||
It is represented by wxClientID type and can have one of these values:
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxART_TOOLBAR
|
||||
@li wxART_MENU
|
||||
@li wxART_BUTTON
|
||||
@li wxART_FRAME_ICON
|
||||
@li wxART_CMN_DIALOG
|
||||
@li wxART_HELP_BROWSER
|
||||
@li wxART_MESSAGE_BOX
|
||||
@li wxART_OTHER (used for all requests that don't fit into any of the
|
||||
@li wxART_TOOLBAR
|
||||
@li wxART_MENU
|
||||
@li wxART_BUTTON
|
||||
@li wxART_FRAME_ICON
|
||||
@li wxART_CMN_DIALOG
|
||||
@li wxART_HELP_BROWSER
|
||||
@li wxART_MESSAGE_BOX
|
||||
@li wxART_OTHER (used for all requests that don't fit into any of the
|
||||
categories above)
|
||||
|
||||
Client ID servers as a hint to wxArtProvider that is supposed to help it to
|
||||
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ public:
|
||||
resource. Note that returned bitmaps are cached by wxArtProvider and it is
|
||||
therefore not necessary to optimize CreateBitmap() for speed (e.g. you may
|
||||
create wxBitmap objects from XPMs here).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the bitmap.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This is not part of wxArtProvider's public API, use wxArtProvider::GetBitmap
|
||||
or wxArtProvider::GetIconBundle or wxArtProvider::GetIcon to query wxArtProvider
|
||||
for a resource.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateIconBundle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap CreateBitmap(const wxArtID& id,
|
||||
@@ -203,14 +203,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Query registered providers for bitmap with given ID.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the bitmap.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
wxArtClient identifier of the client (i.e. who is asking for the bitmap).
|
||||
@param size
|
||||
Size of the returned bitmap or wxDefaultSize if size doesn't matter.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The bitmap if one of registered providers recognizes the ID or
|
||||
wxNullBitmap otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -238,13 +238,13 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Query registered providers for icon bundle with given ID.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the icon bundle.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
wxArtClient identifier of the client (i.e. who is asking for the icon
|
||||
bundle).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The icon bundle if one of registered providers recognizes the ID
|
||||
or wxNullIconBundle otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Register new art provider and add it to the bottom of providers stack
|
||||
(i.e. it will be queried as the last one).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Push()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Insert(wxArtProvider* provider);
|
||||
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Register new art provider and add it to the top of providers stack
|
||||
(i.e. it will be queried as the first provider).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Push(wxArtProvider* provider);
|
||||
|
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ size_t wxBase64EncodedSize(size_t len);
|
||||
The length of the input string or special value wxNO_LEN if the string is
|
||||
NUL-terminated and the length should be computed by this function itself.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
This parameter specifies the function behaviour when invalid characters
|
||||
This parameter specifies the function behaviour when invalid characters
|
||||
are encountered in input. By default, any such character stops the
|
||||
decoding with error. If the mode is wxBase64DecodeMode_SkipWS, then the
|
||||
white space characters are silently skipped instead. And if it is
|
||||
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ size_t wxBase64Decode(void* dst, size_t dstLen,
|
||||
This overload allocates memory internally and returns it as wxMemoryBuffer
|
||||
and is recommended for normal use.
|
||||
|
||||
This overload returns a buffer with the base64 decoded binary equivalent
|
||||
This overload returns a buffer with the base64 decoded binary equivalent
|
||||
of the input string. In neither case is the buffer @NULL-terminated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMemoryBuffer wxBase64Decode(const char* src,
|
||||
|
@@ -278,42 +278,42 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the background colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the foreground colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the caret position (in pixels).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetPosition()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Point
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetPositionXY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( x, y )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the caret size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Size
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSizeWH()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -121,11 +121,11 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the blink time for all the carets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Under Windows, this function will change the blink time for all
|
||||
carets permanently (until the next time it is called),
|
||||
even for the carets in other applications.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBlinkTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetBlinkTime(int milliseconds);
|
||||
|
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCheckBox();
|
||||
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns wxCHK_UNCHECKED when the checkbox is unchecked,
|
||||
wxCHK_CHECKED when it is checked and
|
||||
wxCHK_UNDETERMINED when it's in the undetermined state.
|
||||
@@ -109,14 +109,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if it is checked, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the checkbox is a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if this checkbox is a 3-state checkbox, @false if
|
||||
it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the user can set the checkbox to the third state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if the user can set the third state of this
|
||||
checkbox, @false if it can only be set programmatically
|
||||
or if it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the checkbox to the given state. This does not cause a
|
||||
wxEVT_COMMAND_CHECKBOX_CLICKED event to get emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param state
|
||||
If @true, the check is on, otherwise it is off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Checks the given item. Note that calling this method doesn't result in
|
||||
wxEVT_COMMAND_CHECKLISTBOX_TOGGLE being emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
Index of item to check.
|
||||
@param check
|
||||
|
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a choice.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxChoice();
|
||||
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This is implemented for Motif only and always returns 1 for the
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
||||
That is, while the dropdown list is shown, it returns the currently selected
|
||||
item in it. When it is not shown, its result is the same as for the other
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.6.2} (before this version
|
||||
wxControlWithItems::GetSelection itself behaved like
|
||||
this).
|
||||
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Number of columns.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
After this function has been called, the clipboard owns the data, so do not
|
||||
delete
|
||||
the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AddData(wxDataObject* data);
|
||||
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
After this function has been called, the clipboard owns the data, so do not
|
||||
delete
|
||||
the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetData(wxDataObject* data);
|
||||
|
@@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ class wxClientDataContainer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientDataContainer();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxClientDataContainer();
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if long options are enabled, otherwise @false.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see EnableLongOptions()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AreLongOptionsEnabled() const;
|
||||
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Enable or disable support for the long options.
|
||||
As long options are not (yet) POSIX-compliant, this option allows to disable
|
||||
them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Customization() and AreLongOptionsEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableLongOptions(bool enable = true);
|
||||
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Parse the command line, return 0 if ok, -1 if @c "-h" or @c "--help"
|
||||
option was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
|
||||
syntax error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param giveUsage
|
||||
If @true (default), the usage message is given if a
|
||||
syntax error was encountered while parsing the command line or if help was
|
||||
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Give the standard usage message describing all program options. It will use the
|
||||
options and parameters descriptions specified earlier, so the resulting message
|
||||
will not be helpful to the user unless the descriptions were indeed specified.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLogo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Usage() const;
|
||||
|
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the current print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
number of dots per inch, or
|
||||
one of the following identifiers:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On input you should pass one of these identifiers, but on return you may get
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
@@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the desired print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
number of dots per inch, or
|
||||
one of the following identifiers:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On input you should pass one of these identifiers, but on return you may get
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
|
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Invalid entries in custom colours list will be ignored on some platforms (GTK)
|
||||
or replaced with white colour on platforms where custom colours palette has
|
||||
fixed size (MSW).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColourDialog(wxWindow* parent, wxColourData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param red
|
||||
The red value.
|
||||
@param green
|
||||
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The colour name.
|
||||
@param colour
|
||||
The colour to copy.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourDatabase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour();
|
||||
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
is not
|
||||
specified in flags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAsString(long flags);
|
||||
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and the HTML-like syntax (i.e. @c "#" followed by 6 hexadecimal digits
|
||||
for red, green, blue components).
|
||||
Returns @true if the conversion was successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(unsigned char red, unsigned char green,
|
||||
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using a colour name to be found in the colour database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourDatabase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour operator =(const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
|
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class must implement this to create the popup control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the call succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Create(wxWindow* parent);
|
||||
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class may implement this to return adjusted size
|
||||
for the popup control, according to the variables given.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param minWidth
|
||||
Preferred minimum width.
|
||||
@param prefHeight
|
||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param maxWidth
|
||||
Max height for window, as limited by
|
||||
screen size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Called each time popup is about to be shown.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetAdjustedSize(int minWidth, int prefHeight,
|
||||
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ public:
|
||||
until the popup is shown for the first time. It is more
|
||||
efficient, but on the other hand it is often more convenient
|
||||
to have the control created immediately.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Base implementation returns @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LazyCreate();
|
||||
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a combo control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxComboCtrl();
|
||||
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This member function is not normally called in application code.
|
||||
Instead, it can be implemented in a derived class to create a
|
||||
custom popup animation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if animation finishes before the function returns. @false
|
||||
otherwise. In the latter case you need to manually call
|
||||
DoShowPopup after the animation ends.
|
||||
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is properly shown after a popup animation has finished (but only
|
||||
if AnimateShow() did not finish
|
||||
the animation within it's function scope).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param rect
|
||||
Position to show the popup window at, in screen coordinates.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns disabled button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the disabled state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled() const;
|
||||
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns button mouse hover bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the mouse hover state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapHover() const;
|
||||
@@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns default button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the normal state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapNormal() const;
|
||||
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns depressed button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the depressed state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapPressed() const;
|
||||
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns custom painted area in control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCustomPaintWidth().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCustomPaintWidth() const;
|
||||
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns features supported by wxComboCtrl. If needed feature is missing,
|
||||
you need to instead use wxGenericComboCtrl, which however may lack
|
||||
native look and feel (but otherwise sports identical API).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Value returned is a combination of following flags:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFeatures();
|
||||
@@ -403,18 +403,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the popup window is in the given state.
|
||||
Possible values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Hidden()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is hidden.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Animating()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is being shown, but the
|
||||
popup animation has not yet finished.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Visible()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is fully visible.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPopupWindowState(int state) const;
|
||||
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the text between the two positions in the combo control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the text between two positions with the given text, in the combo
|
||||
control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets custom dropdown button graphics.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bmpNormal
|
||||
Default button image.
|
||||
@param pushButtonBg
|
||||
@@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets size and position of dropdown button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Button width. Value = 0 specifies default.
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
@@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the insertion point in the text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The new insertion point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -535,21 +535,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Extends popup size horizontally, relative to the edges of the combo control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param extLeft
|
||||
How many pixel to extend beyond the left edge of the
|
||||
control. Default is 0.
|
||||
@param extRight
|
||||
How many pixel to extend beyond the right edge of the
|
||||
control. Default is 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Popup minimum width may override arguments.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupExtents(int extLeft, int extRight);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets preferred maximum height of the popup.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Value -1 indicates the default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupMaxHeight(int height);
|
||||
@@ -557,14 +557,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets minimum width of the popup. If wider than combo control, it will extend to
|
||||
the left.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Value -1 indicates the default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupMinWidth(int width);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the text between the two positions, in the combo control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a combobox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxComboBox();
|
||||
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the text between the two positions in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the text between two positions with the given text, in the combobox
|
||||
text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the insertion point in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The new insertion point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the text between the two positions, in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the text for the combobox text field.
|
||||
@b NB: For a combobox with @c wxCB_READONLY style the string must be in
|
||||
the combobox choices list, otherwise the call to SetValue() is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
The text to set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
This is the default and only constructor of the wxConfigBase class, and
|
||||
derived classes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param appName
|
||||
The application name. If this is empty, the class will
|
||||
normally use wxApp::GetAppName to set it. The
|
||||
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This parameter is only used by wxFileConfig when compiled
|
||||
in Unicode mode. It specifies the encoding in which the configuration file
|
||||
is written.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks By default, environment variable expansion is on and recording
|
||||
defaults is off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxConfigBase
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxConfigBase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -136,9 +136,9 @@ public:
|
||||
config file. @e DeleteAll() is especially useful if you want to erase all
|
||||
traces of your program presence: for example, when you uninstall it.
|
||||
DeleteEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DeleteGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DeleteAll()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -182,19 +182,19 @@ public:
|
||||
from running several enumerations simultaneously, that's why you must pass it
|
||||
explicitly.
|
||||
Having said all this, enumerating the config entries/groups is very simple:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There are also functions to get the number of entries/subgroups without
|
||||
actually enumerating them, but you will probably never need them.
|
||||
GetFirstGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFirstEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfEntries()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfGroups()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ public:
|
||||
bool GetNextGroup(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -309,18 +309,18 @@ public:
|
||||
Final remark: the @e szKey parameter for all these functions can contain an
|
||||
arbitrary path (either relative or absolute), not just the key name.
|
||||
Read()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Write()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Flush()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetAppName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVendorName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFileConfig::SetUmask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ public:
|
||||
first of them is the expansion of environment variables in the string values
|
||||
read from the config file: for example, if you have the following in your
|
||||
config file:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the call to @c config-Read("UserData") will return something like
|
||||
@c "/home/zeitlin/data" if you're lucky enough to run a Linux system ;-)
|
||||
Although this feature is very useful, it may be annoying if you read a value
|
||||
@@ -341,11 +341,11 @@ public:
|
||||
would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
|
||||
The following functions control this option:
|
||||
IsExpandingEnvVars()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetExpandEnvVars()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRecordDefaults()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsRecordingDefaults()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -359,18 +359,18 @@ public:
|
||||
which makes it possible to use the relative paths. To clarify all this, here
|
||||
is an example (it is only for the sake of demonstration, it doesn't do anything
|
||||
sensible!):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@e Warning: it is probably a good idea to always restore the path to its
|
||||
old value on function exit:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
because otherwise the assert in the following example will surely fail
|
||||
(we suppose here that @e foo() function is the same as above except that it
|
||||
doesn't save and restore the path):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the path separator in wxConfigBase and derived classes is always '/',
|
||||
regardless of the platform (i.e. it is @b not '\\' under Windows).
|
||||
SetPath()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -382,22 +382,22 @@ public:
|
||||
returning @true if the value was found.
|
||||
If the value was not found, @a defaultVal is used instead.
|
||||
bool Read(const wxStringkey, T* value) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Read(key, default="")
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a string
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadInt(key, default=0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns an integer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadFloat(key, default=0.0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a floating point number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadBool(key, default=0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str) const;
|
||||
@@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the new name already exists or because the function is not supported in this
|
||||
wxConfig implementation.
|
||||
RenameEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RenameGroup()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -526,22 +526,22 @@ public:
|
||||
in it. For example wxFontMapper or Unix version
|
||||
of wxFileDialog have the ability to use wxConfig class.
|
||||
Set()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Get()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DontCreateOnDemand()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Exists()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEntryType()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -551,22 +551,22 @@ public:
|
||||
These functions write the specified value to the config file and return @true
|
||||
on success. In the last one, function wxToString() must be
|
||||
defined for type @e T.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Write(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a string
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteInt(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes an integer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteFloat(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a floating point number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteBool(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Write(const wxString& key, const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the latter if the help doesn't depend on the position.
|
||||
Returns @true if help was shown, or @false if no help was available for this
|
||||
window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param window
|
||||
Window to show help text for.
|
||||
@param point
|
||||
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a context help button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Appends several items at once to the control. Notice that calling this method
|
||||
is usually much faster than appending them one by one if you need to add a lot
|
||||
of items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
String to add.
|
||||
@param stringsArray
|
||||
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Number of items in the strings array.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Array of client data pointers of size n to associate with the new items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns When appending a single item, the return value is the index of
|
||||
the newly added item which may be different from the
|
||||
last one if the control is sorted (e.g. has wxLB_SORT
|
||||
@@ -86,22 +86,22 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that it is an error (signalled by an assert failure in debug builds) to
|
||||
remove an item with the index negative or greater or equal than the number of
|
||||
items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Clear()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Delete(unsigned int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Finds an item whose label matches the given string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
String to find.
|
||||
@param caseSensitive
|
||||
Whether search is case sensitive (default is not).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The zero-based position of the item, or wxNOT_FOUND if the
|
||||
string was not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -113,10 +113,10 @@ public:
|
||||
It is an error to call this function for a control which doesn't have untyped
|
||||
client data at all although it is ok to call it even if the given item doesn't
|
||||
have any client data associated with it (but other items do).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based position of the item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
@@ -126,17 +126,17 @@ public:
|
||||
It is an error to call this function for a control which doesn't have typed
|
||||
client data at all although it is ok to call it even if the given item doesn't
|
||||
have any client data associated with it (but other items do).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based position of the item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsEmpty()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetCount() const;
|
||||
@@ -144,23 +144,23 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the selected item or @c wxNOT_FOUND if no item is
|
||||
selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The position of the current selection.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method can be used with single selection list boxes only,
|
||||
you should use wxListBox::GetSelections for the list
|
||||
boxes with wxLB_MULTIPLE style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetSelection(), GetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the item with the given index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The label of the item or an empty string if the position was
|
||||
invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the selected item or an empty string if no item is
|
||||
selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection() const;
|
||||
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is usually much faster than inserting them one by one if you need to insert a
|
||||
lot
|
||||
of items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
String to add.
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Number of items in the strings array.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Array of client data pointers of size n to associate with the new items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The return value is the index of the newly inserted item. If the
|
||||
insertion failed for some reason, -1 is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the control is empty or @false if it has some items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Replaces the current control contents with the given items. Notice that calling
|
||||
this method is much faster than appending the items one by one if you need to
|
||||
append a lot of them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
The single item to insert into the control.
|
||||
@param stringsArray
|
||||
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ public:
|
||||
'strings'.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Client data to associate with the item(s).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns When the control is sorted (e.g. has wxLB_SORT or wxCB_SORT
|
||||
style) the return value could be different from
|
||||
(GetCount() - 1). When setting a single item to the
|
||||
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Associates the given untyped client data pointer with the given item. Note that
|
||||
it is an error to call this function if any typed client data pointers had been
|
||||
associated with the control items before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ public:
|
||||
control itself is destroyed).
|
||||
Note that it is an error to call this function if any untyped client data
|
||||
pointers had been associated with the control items before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
@@ -302,17 +302,17 @@ public:
|
||||
if @a n == @c wxNOT_FOUND.
|
||||
Note that this does not cause any command events to be emitted nor does it
|
||||
deselect any other items in the controls which support multiple selections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The string position to select, starting from zero.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetString(), SetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelection(int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label for the given item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
@@ -323,10 +323,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the item with the specified string in the control. This doesn't cause
|
||||
any command events to be emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
The string to select.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the specified string has been selected, @false if it
|
||||
wasn't found in the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy constructor, uses @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bits
|
||||
An array of bits.
|
||||
@param maskBits
|
||||
@@ -58,370 +58,370 @@ public:
|
||||
it defaults to wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE. Under MacOS, it defaults to
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_MACCURSOR_RESOURCE.
|
||||
Under X, the permitted cursor types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Under Windows, the permitted types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a cursor from a .cur cursor file (only if USE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_MSW
|
||||
is enabled in setup.h).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows resource (as specified in the .rc file).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a cursor from a .ico icon file (only if USE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_MSW
|
||||
is enabled in setup.h). Specify hotSpotX and hotSpotY.
|
||||
@param cursorId
|
||||
A stock cursor identifier. May be one of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A standard arrow cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_RIGHT_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A standard arrow cursor
|
||||
pointing to the right.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_BLANK
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Transparent cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_BULLSEYE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bullseye cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_CHAR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Rectangular character cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_CROSS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cross cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_HAND
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A hand cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_IBEAM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
An I-beam cursor (vertical line).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_LEFT_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the left button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_MAGNIFIER
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A magnifier icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_MIDDLE_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the middle button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_NO_ENTRY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A no-entry sign cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_PAINT_BRUSH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A paintbrush cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_PENCIL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A pencil cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_POINT_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor that points left.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_POINT_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor that points right.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_QUESTION_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
An arrow and question mark.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_RIGHT_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the right button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENESW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing NE-SW.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing N-S.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENWSE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing NW-SE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZEWE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing W-E.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZING
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A general sizing cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SPRAYCAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A spraycan cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_WAIT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A wait cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_WATCH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A watch cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_ARROWWAIT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor with both an arrow and
|
||||
an hourglass, (windows.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that not all cursors are available on all platforms.
|
||||
@param cursor
|
||||
Pointer or reference to a cursor to copy.
|
||||
|
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ class wxDataViewEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewEvent(wxEventType commandType = wxEVT_NULL,
|
||||
int winid = 0);
|
||||
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
||||
const wxVariant GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColumn(int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -117,12 +117,12 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetDataViewColumn(wxDataViewColumn* col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetModel(wxDataViewModel* model);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(const wxVariant& value);
|
||||
};
|
||||
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ class wxDataViewIconTextRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewIconTextRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "wxDataViewIconText",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Activate( wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ public:
|
||||
virtual bool LeftClick( wxPoint cursor,
|
||||
wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel * model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ public:
|
||||
virtual bool RightClick(wxPoint cursor,
|
||||
wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool StartDrag(wxPoint cursor, wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ class wxDataViewBitmapRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewBitmapRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "wxBitmap",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ class wxDataViewItem
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem(void* id = NULL);
|
||||
wxDataViewItem(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
@@ -1344,7 +1344,7 @@ class wxDataViewTextRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTextRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "string",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ class wxDataViewProgressRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewProgressRenderer(const wxString& label = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
const wxString& varianttype = "long",
|
||||
@@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ class wxDataViewToggleRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewToggleRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "bool",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
@@ -1456,7 +1456,7 @@ public:
|
||||
~wxDataViewTreeCtrl();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem AppendContainer(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
const wxString& text,
|
||||
@@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxClientData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem AppendItem(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
const wxString& text,
|
||||
@@ -1769,7 +1769,7 @@ class wxDataViewDateRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewDateRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "datetime",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_ACTIVATABLE);
|
||||
@@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ class wxDataViewTextRendererAttr : public wxDataViewTextRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTextRendererAttr(const wxString& varianttype = "string",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT,
|
||||
|
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ public:
|
||||
SetRange(), returns the lower and upper
|
||||
bounds of this range. If no range is set (or only one of the bounds is set),
|
||||
@a dt1 and/or @a dt2 are set to be invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dt1
|
||||
Pointer to the object which receives the lower range limit or
|
||||
becomes invalid if it is not set. May be @NULL if the caller is not
|
||||
interested in lower limit
|
||||
@param dt2
|
||||
Same as above but for the upper limit
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @false if no range limits are currently set, @true if at least one
|
||||
bound is set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ public:
|
||||
control. The native version always uses the current system locale.
|
||||
Sets the display format for the date in the control. See wxDateTime for the
|
||||
meaning of format strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the format parameter is invalid, the behaviour is undefined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFormat(const wxChar* format);
|
||||
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the valid range for the date selection. If @a dt1 is valid, it becomes
|
||||
the earliest date (inclusive) accepted by the control. If @a dt2 is valid,
|
||||
it becomes the latest possible date.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the current value of the control is outside of the newly set
|
||||
range bounds, the behaviour is undefined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -35,39 +35,39 @@ public:
|
||||
some more complicated calculations to find the answer are under the
|
||||
@ref overview_datetimecalculations "Calendar calculations" section.
|
||||
IsValid()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTicks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCentury()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetHour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMinute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetSecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMillisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDayOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekOfMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYearDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsWorkDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsGregorianDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetAsDOS()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ public:
|
||||
@ref getmodifiedjuliandaynumber() MJD or
|
||||
@ref getratadie() "Rata Die number" from it.
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimejdn() "wxDateTime(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setjdn() "Set(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetJDN()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMJD()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRataDie()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -110,33 +110,33 @@ public:
|
||||
All (non-const) functions in this section don't modify the time part of the
|
||||
wxDateTime -- they only work with the date part of it.
|
||||
SetToWeekDayInSameWeek()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDayInSameWeek()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToNextWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToPrevWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetPrevWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxDateTime::getweekday2 GetWeekDay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToLastWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLastWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToWeekOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToLastMonthDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLastMonthDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToYearDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYearDay()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -147,49 +147,49 @@ public:
|
||||
should use IsValid() method to check that the
|
||||
values were correct as constructors can not return an error code.
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimedef() wxDateTime
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetimet() wxDateTime(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetm() "wxDateTime(struct tm)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimejdn() "wxDateTime(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetime() "wxDateTime(h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimedate() "wxDateTime(day, mon, year, h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToCurrent()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settimet() Set(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settm() "Set(struct tm)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setjdn() "Set(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settime() "Set(h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setdate() "Set(day, mon, year, h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setfromdos() "SetFromDOS(unsigned long ddt)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ResetTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setdate() SetDay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetHour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMinute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetSecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMillisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatoreqtimet() operator=(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatoreqtm() "operator=(struct tm)"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -214,21 +214,21 @@ public:
|
||||
modifies the object to which it is applied. The operators -= and += are
|
||||
defined to be equivalent to the second forms of these functions.
|
||||
@ref addts() Add(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addds() Add(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractts() Subtract(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractds() Subtract(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractdt() Subtract(wxDateTime)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addts() oparator+=(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addds() oparator+=(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractts() oparator-=(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractds() oparator-=(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -237,19 +237,19 @@ public:
|
||||
There are several function to allow date comparison. To supplement them, a few
|
||||
global operators , etc taking wxDateTime are defined.
|
||||
IsEqualTo()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEarlierThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLaterThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsBetween()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSameDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSameTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEqualUpTo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ public:
|
||||
It also accepts a few wxWidgets-specific extensions: you can optionally specify
|
||||
the width of the field to follow using @c printf(3)-like syntax and the
|
||||
format specification @c %l can be used to get the number of milliseconds.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ParseFormat()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString Format(const wxChar* format = wxDefaultDateTimeFormat,
|
||||
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ public:
|
||||
result exactly corresponding to the ISO standard, but it can also be useful to
|
||||
use a space as seprator if a more human-readable combined date-time
|
||||
representation is needed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see FormatISODate(), FormatISOTime(),
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Get the beginning of DST for the given country in the given year (current one
|
||||
by default). This function suffers from limitations described in
|
||||
@ref overview_tdatedst "DST overview".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEndDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime GetBeginDST(int year = Inv_Year,
|
||||
@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default country. The default country is used for DST
|
||||
calculations, for example.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCountry()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Country GetCountry();
|
||||
@@ -360,9 +360,9 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object having the same date component as this one but time of
|
||||
00:00:00.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.2}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetDateOnly() const;
|
||||
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the end of DST for the given country in the given year (current one by
|
||||
default).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBeginDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime GetEndDST(int year = Inv_Year,
|
||||
@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @ref setjdn() JDN corresponding to this date. Beware
|
||||
of rounding errors!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetJulianDayNumber() const;
|
||||
@@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
given month.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeekDayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetMonthName(Month month,
|
||||
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
given week day.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMonthName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetWeekDayName(WeekDay weekday,
|
||||
@@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
is @true or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsBetween(const wxDateTime& t1, const wxDateTime& t2) const;
|
||||
@@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsStrictlyBetween(const wxDateTime& t1,
|
||||
@@ -695,11 +695,11 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the current time.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this function is accurate up to second:
|
||||
UNow() should be used for better precision
|
||||
(but it is less efficient and might not be available on all platforms).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Today()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime Now();
|
||||
@@ -861,31 +861,31 @@ public:
|
||||
additional argument of wxString::const_iterator type in which, if it is not
|
||||
@NULL, an iterator pointing to the end of the scanned string part is returned.
|
||||
ParseFormat()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseDateTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISODate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISOTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDateTime::ParseRfc822Date
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Format()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISOCombined()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISODate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISOTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ public:
|
||||
calculations, date formatting and other things.
|
||||
The possible values for @a country parameter are enumerated in
|
||||
@ref overview_wxdatetime "wxDateTime constants section".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCountry()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetCountry(Country country);
|
||||
@@ -1046,43 +1046,43 @@ public:
|
||||
Please note that although several function accept an extra @e Calendar
|
||||
parameter, it is currently ignored as only the Gregorian calendar is
|
||||
supported. Future versions will support other calendars.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsWestEuropeanCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCurrentYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ConvertYearToBC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCurrentMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLeapYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref getcenturystatic() GetCentury
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMonthName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDayName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetAmPmStrings()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDSTApplicable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetBeginDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEndDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Now()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
UNow()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Today()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1097,21 +1097,21 @@ public:
|
||||
Please see the @ref overview_tdatetimezones "time zone overview" for more
|
||||
information about time zones. Normally, these functions should be rarely used.
|
||||
FromTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ToTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeFromTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ToUTC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeUTC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetBeginDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEndDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the midnight of the current day (i.e. the
|
||||
same as Now(), but the time part is set to 0).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Now()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime Today();
|
||||
@@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the current time including the
|
||||
milliseconds if a function to get time with such precision is available on the
|
||||
current platform (supported under most Unices and Win32).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Now()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime UNow();
|
||||
@@ -1236,14 +1236,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one day.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Days()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Day();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of days.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Day()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Days(int days);
|
||||
@@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of days (only, that it not counting the weeks component!)
|
||||
in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDays() const;
|
||||
@@ -1264,14 +1264,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the combined number of days in this date span, counting both weeks and
|
||||
days. It still doesn't take neither months nor years into the account.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeeks(), GetDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTotalDays() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of weeks in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWeeks() const;
|
||||
@@ -1283,14 +1283,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one month.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Months()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Month();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of months.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Month()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Months(int mon);
|
||||
@@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Changes the sign of this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Negate()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Neg();
|
||||
@@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the date span with the opposite sign.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Neg()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Negate() const;
|
||||
@@ -1360,28 +1360,28 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one week.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Weeks()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Week();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of weeks.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Week()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Weeks(int weeks);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one year.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Years()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Year();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of years.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Year()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Years(int years);
|
||||
@@ -1433,15 +1433,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetSeconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMinutes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetHours()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeeks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1473,35 +1473,35 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string containing the formatted representation of the time span.
|
||||
The following format specifiers are allowed after %:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
H
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Hours
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
M
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Minutes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
S
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Seconds
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
l
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of mi@b lliseconds
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
D
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Days
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
E
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of w@b Eeks
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the percent character
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that, for example, the number of hours in the description above is not
|
||||
well defined: it can be either the total number of hours (for example, for a
|
||||
time span of 50 hours this would be 50) or just the hour part of the time
|
||||
@@ -1643,15 +1643,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Add()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Subtract()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Multiply()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Negate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Neg()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Abs()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1668,27 +1668,27 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Milliseconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Millisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Seconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Second()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Minutes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Minute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hours()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Days()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Day()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Weeks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Week()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1704,15 +1704,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsNull()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsPositive()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsNegative()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEqualTo()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLongerThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsShorterThan()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
Constructs a datastream object from an output stream. Only write methods will
|
||||
be available. The second form is only available in Unicode build of wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The output stream.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
Constructs a datastream object from an input stream. Only read methods will
|
||||
be available. The second form is only available in Unicode build of wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The input stream.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
|
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Copy from a source DC to this DC, specifying the destination
|
||||
coordinates, size of area to copy, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask, and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xdest
|
||||
Destination device context x position.
|
||||
@param ydest
|
||||
@@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ public:
|
||||
with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does
|
||||
the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a temporary bitmap and copies the destination area into it.
|
||||
Copies the source area into the temporary bitmap using the specified
|
||||
logical function.
|
||||
@@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ public:
|
||||
and the background colour set to WHITE.
|
||||
ORs the temporary bitmap with the destination area.
|
||||
Deletes the temporary bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sequence of operations ensures that the source's transparent area need
|
||||
not be black,
|
||||
and logical functions are supported.
|
||||
@@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ public:
|
||||
and ysrc
|
||||
will be assumed for the mask source position. Currently only implemented on
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks There is partial support for Blit in wxPostScriptDC, under X.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see StretchBlit(), wxMemoryDC, wxBitmap, wxMask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Blit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Adds the specified point to the bounding box which can be retrieved with
|
||||
MinX(), MaxX() and
|
||||
MinY(), MaxY() functions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetBoundingBox()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
|
||||
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a circle with the given centre and radius.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawEllipse()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius);
|
||||
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Draws an ellipse contained in the rectangle specified either with the given top
|
||||
left corner and the given size or directly. The current pen is used for the
|
||||
outline and the current brush for filling the shape.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawCircle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ public:
|
||||
particular, a font different from @c wxNORMAL_FONT should be used as the
|
||||
latter is not a TrueType font. @c wxSWISS_FONT is an example of a font
|
||||
which is.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
|
||||
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBackgroundMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the depth (number of bits/pixel) of this DC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDisplayDepth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is supported, the return value will either be @c wxLayout_LeftToRight or
|
||||
@c wxLayout_RightToLeft. If RTL layout is not supported, the return value will
|
||||
be @c wxLayout_Default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutDirection GetLayoutDirection() const;
|
||||
@@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the optional parameter @a font is specified and valid, then it is used
|
||||
for the text extent calculation. Otherwise the currently selected font is.
|
||||
Note that this function works both with single-line and multi-line strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFont, SetFont(), GetPartialTextExtents(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& string, wxCoord* w,
|
||||
@@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ public:
|
||||
various platforms have a native API function that is faster or more
|
||||
accurate than the generic implementation then it should be used
|
||||
instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMultiLineTextExtent(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPartialTextExtents(const wxString& text,
|
||||
@@ -559,14 +559,14 @@ public:
|
||||
represent the maximum horizontal and vertical 'pixel' values used in your
|
||||
application, the following code will scale the graphic to fit on the
|
||||
printer page:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Size
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSizeWH()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the optional parameter @a font is specified and valid, then it is used
|
||||
for the text extent calculation. Otherwise the currently selected font is.
|
||||
Note that this function only works with single-line strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFont, SetFont(), GetPartialTextExtents(),
|
||||
GetMultiLineTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CalcBoundingBox()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetBoundingBox();
|
||||
@@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the x and y axis orientation (i.e., the direction from lowest to
|
||||
highest values on the axis). The default orientation is
|
||||
x axis from left to right and y axis from top down.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xLeftRight
|
||||
True to set the x axis orientation to the natural
|
||||
left to right orientation, @false to invert it.
|
||||
@@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The clipping region is an area to which drawing is restricted. Possible uses
|
||||
for the clipping region are for clipping text or for speeding up window redraws
|
||||
when only a known area of the screen is damaged.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DestroyClippingRegion(), wxRegion
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the current layout direction for the device context. @a dir may be either
|
||||
@c wxLayout_Default, @c wxLayout_LeftToRight or @c wxLayout_RightToLeft.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLayoutDirection(wxLayoutDirection dir);
|
||||
@@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The possible values
|
||||
and their meaning in terms of source and destination pixel values are
|
||||
as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The default is wxCOPY, which simply draws with the current colour.
|
||||
The others combine the current colour and the background using a
|
||||
logical operation. wxINVERT is commonly used for drawing rubber bands or
|
||||
@@ -819,26 +819,26 @@ public:
|
||||
Drawing to a Windows printer device context uses the current mapping mode,
|
||||
but mapping mode is currently ignored for PostScript output.
|
||||
The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TWIPS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/20 of a point, or 1/1440 of
|
||||
an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_POINTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is a point, or 1/72 of an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_METRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_LOMETRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/10 of a mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 device pixel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMapMode(int int);
|
||||
@@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ public:
|
||||
coordinates, destination size, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
size of source area to copy, logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask,
|
||||
and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xdest
|
||||
Destination device context x position.
|
||||
@param ydest
|
||||
@@ -922,8 +922,8 @@ public:
|
||||
with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does
|
||||
the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a temporary bitmap and copies the destination area into it.
|
||||
Copies the source area into the temporary bitmap using the specified
|
||||
logical function.
|
||||
@@ -936,8 +936,8 @@ public:
|
||||
and the background colour set to WHITE.
|
||||
ORs the temporary bitmap with the destination area.
|
||||
Deletes the temporary bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sequence of operations ensures that the source's transparent area need
|
||||
not be black,
|
||||
and logical functions are supported.
|
||||
@@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and ysrc
|
||||
will be assumed for the mask source position. Currently only implemented on
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks There is partial support for Blit in wxPostScriptDC, under X.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StretchBlit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord dstWidth,
|
||||
|
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Init() methods later in order to use the object.
|
||||
The other constructors initialize the object immediately and @c Init()
|
||||
must not be called after using them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dc
|
||||
The underlying DC: everything drawn to this object will be
|
||||
flushed to this DC when this object is destroyed. You may pass @NULL
|
||||
|
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Also, before using the updated bitmap data, make sure to select it out of
|
||||
context first
|
||||
(for example by selecting wxNullBitmap into the device context).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawBitmap
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SelectObject(wxBitmap& bitmap);
|
||||
|
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
||||
You might use this pair of functions when implementing a drag feature, for
|
||||
example
|
||||
as in the wxSplitterWindow implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This function is probably obsolete since the X implementations
|
||||
allow drawing directly on the screen now. However, the
|
||||
fact that this function allows the screen to be
|
||||
|
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a circle with the given centre and radius.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawEllipse
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius);
|
||||
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Draws an ellipse contained in the rectangle specified either with the given top
|
||||
left corner and the given size or directly. The current pen is used for the
|
||||
outline and the current brush for filling the shape.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawCircle
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::SetBackgroundMode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
@@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::CalcBoundingBox
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetBoundingBox();
|
||||
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the x and y axis orientation (i.e., the direction from lowest to
|
||||
highest values on the axis). The default orientation is the natural
|
||||
orientation, e.g. x axis from left to right and y axis from bottom up.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xLeftRight
|
||||
True to set the x axis orientation to the natural
|
||||
left to right orientation, @false to invert it.
|
||||
@@ -586,26 +586,26 @@ public:
|
||||
uses the current mapping mode, but mapping mode is currently ignored for
|
||||
PostScript output.
|
||||
The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TWIPS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/20 of a point, or 1/1440 of
|
||||
an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_POINTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is a point, or 1/72 of an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_METRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_LOMETRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/10 of a mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 pixel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMapMode(int int);
|
||||
|
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Can be @NULL, a frame or another dialog box.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Used to associate a name with the window,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual dialog boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDialog();
|
||||
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Centres the dialog box on the display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param direction
|
||||
May be wxHORIZONTAL, wxVERTICAL or wxBOTH.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -200,10 +200,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Ends a modal dialog, passing a value to be returned from the ShowModal()
|
||||
invocation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param retCode
|
||||
The value that should be returned by ShowModal.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ShowModal(), GetReturnCode(), SetReturnCode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndModal(int retCode);
|
||||
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button which works like standard OK button in this
|
||||
dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetAffirmativeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAffirmativeId() const;
|
||||
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button to map presses of @c ESC
|
||||
button to.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEscapeId() const;
|
||||
@@ -276,10 +276,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the return code for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks A return code is normally associated with a modal dialog, where
|
||||
ShowModal() returns a code to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetReturnCode(), ShowModal(), EndModal()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetReturnCode();
|
||||
@@ -295,10 +295,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Iconizes or restores the dialog. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param iconize
|
||||
If @true, iconizes the dialog box; if @false, shows and restores it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Note that in Windows, iconization has no effect since dialog
|
||||
boxes cannot be iconized. However, applications may
|
||||
need to explicitly restore dialog boxes under Motif
|
||||
@@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Always returns @false under Windows since dialogs cannot be
|
||||
iconized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -339,10 +339,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The default handler for wxEVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
The colour change event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Changes the dialog's colour to conform to the current settings
|
||||
(Windows only). Add an event table entry for your
|
||||
dialog class if you wish the behaviour to be different
|
||||
@@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ public:
|
||||
you do override this function, call wxEvent::Skip to
|
||||
propagate the notification to child windows and
|
||||
controls.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxSysColourChangedEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnSysColourChanged(wxSysColourChangedEvent& event);
|
||||
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the special OK button in the PocketPC title bar, an event with this id is
|
||||
generated.
|
||||
By default, the affirmative id is wxID_OK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAffirmativeId(), SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAffirmativeId(int id);
|
||||
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the icon for this dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
The icon to associate with this dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the icons for this dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icons
|
||||
The icons to associate with this dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the adaptation mode, overriding the global adaptation flag. @a mode may be
|
||||
one of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also @ref overview_autoscrollingdialogs "Automatic scrolling dialogs" for
|
||||
more on layout adaptation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the dialog box is modal (Show() blocks
|
||||
control
|
||||
until the dialog is hidden) or modeless (control returns immediately).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -451,26 +451,26 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the return code for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param retCode
|
||||
The integer return code, usually a control identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks A return code is normally associated with a modal dialog, where
|
||||
ShowModal() returns a code to the application.
|
||||
The function EndModal() calls SetReturnCode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetReturnCode(), ShowModal(), EndModal()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReturnCode(int retCode);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hides or shows the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param show
|
||||
If @true, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
|
||||
otherwise the box is hidden. If @false and the dialog is
|
||||
modal, control is returned to the calling program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The preferred way of dismissing a modal dialog is to use
|
||||
EndModal().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Shows a modal dialog. Program flow does not return until the dialog has been
|
||||
dismissed with
|
||||
EndModal().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The return value is the value set with SetReturnCode().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ShowModal();
|
||||
|
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Cancel dialing the number initiated with Dial()
|
||||
with async parameter equal to @true.
|
||||
Note that this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsDialing()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CancelDialing();
|
||||
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dial()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDialing() const;
|
||||
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ public:
|
||||
so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
|
||||
allows to forcefully set the online status - whatever our internal
|
||||
algorithm may think about it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOnline()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOnlineStatus(bool isOnline = true);
|
||||
|
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Main constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show
|
||||
the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
|
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ class wxDisplay
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, setting up a wxDisplay instance with the specified display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
The index of the display to use. This must be non-negative
|
||||
and lower than the value returned by GetCount().
|
||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the display on which the given point lies. Returns
|
||||
@c wxNOT_FOUND if the point is not on any connected display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pt
|
||||
The point to locate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the window is on more than one display it gets the display that overlaps the
|
||||
window the most.
|
||||
Returns @c wxNOT_FOUND if the window is not on any connected display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window to locate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this function to receive dropped text.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
@@ -108,14 +108,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the mouse is being dragged over the drop target. By default,
|
||||
this calls functions return the suggested return value @e def.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
The y coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param def
|
||||
Suggested value for return value. Determined by SHIFT or CONTROL key states.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the desired operation or wxDragNone. This is used for
|
||||
optical feedback from the side of the drop source,
|
||||
typically in form of changing the icon.
|
||||
@@ -126,12 +126,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return @false to veto
|
||||
the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
The y coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Return @true to accept the data, @false to veto the operation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool OnDrop(wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
|
||||
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the mouse enters the drop target. By default, this calls
|
||||
OnDragOver().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param def
|
||||
Suggested default for return value. Determined by SHIFT or CONTROL key
|
||||
states.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the desired operation or wxDragNone. This is used for
|
||||
optical feedback from the side of the drop source,
|
||||
typically in form of changing the icon.
|
||||
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ public:
|
||||
between wxMSW and wxGTK: these are cursors under Windows but icons for GTK.
|
||||
You should use the macro wxDROP_ICON() in portable
|
||||
programs instead of directly using either of these types.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window which initiates the drag and drop operation.
|
||||
@param iconCopy
|
||||
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxDropSource();
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ public:
|
||||
Do it (call this in response to a mouse button press, for example). This starts
|
||||
the drag-and-drop operation which will terminate when the user releases the
|
||||
mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
If wxDrag_AllowMove is included in the flags, data may
|
||||
be moved and not only copied (default). If wxDrag_DefaultMove is
|
||||
specified (which includes the previous flag), this is even the default
|
||||
operation
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the operation requested by the user, may be wxDragCopy,
|
||||
wxDragMove, wxDragLink, wxDragCancel or wxDragNone if
|
||||
an error occurred.
|
||||
@@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ public:
|
||||
in this function. It is called on each mouse move, so your implementation must
|
||||
not be too
|
||||
slow.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param effect
|
||||
The effect to implement. One of wxDragCopy, wxDragMove, wxDragLink and
|
||||
wxDragNone.
|
||||
@param scrolling
|
||||
@true if the window is scrolling. MSW only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Return @false if you want default feedback, or @true if you
|
||||
implement your own feedback. The return values is
|
||||
ignored under GTK.
|
||||
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the icon to use for a certain drag result.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param res
|
||||
The drag result to set the icon for.
|
||||
@param cursor
|
||||
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this function to receive dropped files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
|
@@ -52,23 +52,23 @@ public:
|
||||
wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE The template may be displayed to the user in dialogs.
|
||||
wxTEMPLATE_INVISIBLE The template may not be displayed to the user in dialogs.
|
||||
wxDEFAULT_TEMPLATE_FLAGS Defined as wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName, docClassInfo, viewClassInfo, flags
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will construct document and view objects from the class information
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName, docClassName, viewClassName, flags
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will construct document and view objects from perl packages
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName )
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Wx::DocTemplate::CreateDocument() and
|
||||
@c Wx::DocTemplate::CreateView() must be overridden
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from a config object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FileHistoryLoad(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Saves the file history into a config object. This must be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FileHistorySave(wxConfigBase& resourceFile);
|
||||
@@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one
|
||||
template).
|
||||
This function is used in CreateDocument().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param templates
|
||||
Pointer to an array of templates from which to choose a desired template.
|
||||
@param noTemplates
|
||||
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If more than one template is passed in in templates,
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default is @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* SelectDocumentType(wxDocTemplate** templates,
|
||||
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The dialog normally will not appear because the array of templates only contains
|
||||
those relevant to the document in question, and often there will only be one
|
||||
such.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param templates
|
||||
Pointer to an array of templates from which to choose a desired template.
|
||||
@param noTemplates
|
||||
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If more than one template is passed in in templates,
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default is @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* SelectViewType(wxDocTemplate** templates,
|
||||
@@ -1372,7 +1372,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the list of menus that are managed by this file history object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see UseMenu()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxList GetMenus() const;
|
||||
@@ -1380,7 +1380,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from the given config object. This function should be
|
||||
called explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Load(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
@@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Saves the file history into the given config object. This must be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Save(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
|
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
for
|
||||
wxGenericDragImage, and can be used when the application
|
||||
supplies DoDrawImage() and GetImageRect().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param image
|
||||
Icon or bitmap to be used as the drag image. The bitmap can
|
||||
have a mask.
|
||||
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and Move() to show the image on the screen.
|
||||
Call EndDrag() when the drag has finished.
|
||||
Note that this call automatically calls CaptureMouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param hotspot
|
||||
The location of the drag position relative to the upper-left corner
|
||||
of the image.
|
||||
|
@@ -192,15 +192,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxArray::Add
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::AddAt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Insert
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::SetCount
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_APPEND_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_PREPEND_ARRAY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -230,9 +230,9 @@ public:
|
||||
never use wxBaseArray anyhow it shouldn't be a problem) and that you should not
|
||||
derive your own classes from the array classes.
|
||||
@ref wxArray::ctordef "wxArray default constructor"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxArray::ctorcopy "wxArray copy constructors and assignment operators"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxArray::dtor ~wxArray
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -349,25 +349,25 @@ public:
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY macros and must be fully declared before you use
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY macro.
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
To slightly complicate the matters even further, the operator - defined by
|
||||
default for the array iterators by these macros only makes sense if the array
|
||||
@@ -375,33 +375,33 @@ public:
|
||||
provokes warnings from some compilers and to avoid them you should use the
|
||||
@c _PTR versions of the macros above. For example, to define an array of
|
||||
pointers to @c double you should use:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the above macros are generally only useful for
|
||||
wxObject types. There are separate macros for declaring an array of a simple
|
||||
type,
|
||||
such as an int.
|
||||
The following simple types are supported:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
int
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
long
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
size_t
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
double
|
||||
To create an array of a simple type, simply append the type you want in CAPS to
|
||||
the array definition.
|
||||
For example, for an integer array, you'd use one of the following variants:
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ public:
|
||||
going to put in the array and will prevent the array code from reallocating the
|
||||
memory more times than needed.
|
||||
wxArray::Alloc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Shrink
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -430,11 +430,11 @@ public:
|
||||
retrieve them - possibly using just the C array indexing [] operator which
|
||||
does exactly the same as wxArray::Item method.
|
||||
wxArray::GetCount
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::IsEmpty
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Item
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Last
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Detach() if you don't want this to happen. On the
|
||||
other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens - you
|
||||
should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also WX_CLEAR_ARRAY() macro which deletes all
|
||||
elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Detach() if you don't want this to happen. On
|
||||
the other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens -
|
||||
you should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also WX_CLEAR_ARRAY() macro which deletes all
|
||||
elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -467,22 +467,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
WX_CLEAR_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Empty
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Clear
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::RemoveAt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Remove
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxArray::Index
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::IndexForInsert
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Sort
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@e count. If the array has already @a count or more items, nothing is
|
||||
done. Otherwise, @c count - GetCount() elements are added and initialized to
|
||||
the value @e defval.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxArray::GetCount
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCount(size_t count);
|
||||
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The notation CMPFUNCT should be read as if we had the following declaration:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
where @e T is the type of the array elements. I.e. it is a function returning
|
||||
@e int which is passed two arguments of type @e T *.
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified compare function: this function should
|
||||
@@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ public:
|
||||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You must use WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY() macro to define
|
||||
the array class - otherwise you would get link errors.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ public:
|
||||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that wxWidgets predefines the following standard array classes: @b
|
||||
wxArrayInt,
|
||||
@b wxArrayLong, @b wxArrayShort, @b wxArrayDouble, @b wxArrayPtrVoid.
|
||||
@@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ public:
|
||||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will have to initialize the objects of this class by passing a comparison
|
||||
function to the array object constructor like this:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@ class wxDynamicLibraryDetails
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the load address and the size of this module.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param addr
|
||||
the pointer to the location to return load address in, may be
|
||||
@NULL
|
||||
@param len
|
||||
pointer to the location to return the size of this module in
|
||||
memory in, may be @NULL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the load address and module size were retrieved, @false
|
||||
if this information is not available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ public:
|
||||
function name.
|
||||
Returned value will be @NULL if the symbol was not found in the DLL or if
|
||||
an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dllHandle
|
||||
Valid handle previously returned by
|
||||
LoadLibrary
|
||||
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a handle to the loaded DLL. Use @a success parameter to test if it
|
||||
is valid. If the handle is valid, the library must be unloaded later with
|
||||
UnloadLibrary().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param libname
|
||||
Name of the shared object to load.
|
||||
@param success
|
||||
@@ -218,16 +218,16 @@ public:
|
||||
it adds a @c ".dll" extension under Windows and @c "lib" prefix and
|
||||
@c ".so", @c ".sl" or maybe @c ".dylib" extension under Unix.
|
||||
The possible values for @a cat are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_LIBRARY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
normal library
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_MODULE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
a loadable module or plugin
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CanonicalizePluginName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CanonicalizeName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
@@ -240,14 +240,14 @@ public:
|
||||
to the name to ensure that the plugin which is going to be loaded will be
|
||||
compatible with the main program.
|
||||
The possible values for @a cat are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_PLUGIN_GUI
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
plugin which uses GUI classes (default)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_PLUGIN_BASE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
plugin which only uses wxBase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CanonicalizePluginName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to symbol @a name in the library or @NULL if the library
|
||||
contains no such symbol.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDYNLIB_FUNCTION()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the symbol with the given @a name is present in the dynamic
|
||||
library, @false otherwise. Unlike GetSymbol(),
|
||||
this function doesn't log an error message if the symbol is not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.5.4}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
@@ -312,33 +312,33 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads DLL with the given @a name into memory. The @a flags argument can
|
||||
be a combination of the following bits:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_LAZY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_LAZY under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_NOW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_NOW under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_GLOBAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_GLOBAL under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_VERBATIM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
don't try to append the appropriate extension to
|
||||
the library name (this is done by default).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
default flags, same as wxDL_NOW currently
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_QUIET
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
don't log an error message if the library couldn't be
|
||||
loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns @true if the library was successfully loaded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Load(const wxString& name, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT);
|
||||
|
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window style. See wxEditableListBox.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxEditableListBox();
|
||||
|
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxPLATFORM_CURRENT
|
||||
wxPLATFORM_CURRENT means the platform this binary was compiled for.
|
||||
Examples:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Equivalence is defined in terms of convertibility:
|
||||
two encodings are equivalent if you can convert text between
|
||||
then without losing information (it may - and will - happen
|
||||
@@ -100,19 +100,19 @@ public:
|
||||
it more than once in order to switch to another conversion.
|
||||
@e Method affects behaviour of Convert() in case input character
|
||||
cannot be converted because it does not exist in output encoding:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxCONVERT_STRICT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
follow behaviour of GNU Recode -
|
||||
just copy unconvertible characters to output and don't change them
|
||||
(its integer value will stay the same)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxCONVERT_SUBSTITUTE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
try some (lossy) substitutions
|
||||
- e.g. replace unconvertible latin capitals with acute by ordinary
|
||||
capitals, replace en-dash or em-dash by '-' etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Both modes guarantee that output string will have same length
|
||||
as input string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -121,12 +121,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Notice that this function is easier to use correctly than, for example,
|
||||
ControlDown() because when using the latter you
|
||||
also have to remember to test that none of the other modifiers is pressed:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
and forgetting to do it can result in serious program bugs (e.g. program not
|
||||
working with European keyboard layout where ALTGR key which is seen by
|
||||
the program as combination of CTRL and ALT is used). On the
|
||||
other hand, you can simply write
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
with this function.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetModifiers() const;
|
||||
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a down event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
button).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the specified button (or any button) was in a down state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was an up event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
button).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the interval is set to 0; so update events will be sent as
|
||||
often as possible. You can reduce the frequency that events
|
||||
are sent by changing the mode and/or setting an update interval.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetUpdateTime(), SetUpdateInterval(),
|
||||
SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ public:
|
||||
current time. It is assumed that update events are
|
||||
normally sent in idle time, so this is called at the end of
|
||||
idle processing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CanUpdate(), SetUpdateInterval(),
|
||||
SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ class wxMouseEvent : public wxEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Valid event types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxEVT_ENTER_WINDOW
|
||||
@b wxEVT_LEAVE_WINDOW
|
||||
@b wxEVT_LEFT_DOWN
|
||||
@@ -823,29 +823,29 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the identified mouse button is changing state. Valid
|
||||
values of @a button are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if left button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_MIDDLE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if middle button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if right button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_AUX1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if the first extra button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_AUX2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if the second extra button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_ANY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if any button was pressed
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Button(int button);
|
||||
@@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Same as MetaDown() under Mac, same as
|
||||
ControlDown() elsewhere.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxKeyEvent::CmdDown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CmdDown() const;
|
||||
@@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was a dragging event (motion while a button is depressed).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Moving()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Dragging();
|
||||
@@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Currently this function is implemented only in wxMac and returns -1 for the
|
||||
other platforms (you can still distinguish simple clicks from double-clicks as
|
||||
they generate different kinds of events however).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetClickCount() const;
|
||||
@@ -1512,7 +1512,7 @@ class wxChildFocusEvent : public wxCommandEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The direct child which is (or which contains the window which is) receiving
|
||||
the focus.
|
||||
@@ -1650,25 +1650,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the origin of the help event which is one of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_Unknown
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unrecognized event source.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_Keyboard
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Event generated by @c F1 key press.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_HelpButton
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Event generated by
|
||||
wxContextHelp or using the "?" title bur button under
|
||||
MS Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The application may handle events generated using the keyboard or mouse
|
||||
differently, e.g. by using wxGetMousePosition()
|
||||
for the mouse events.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHelpEvent::Origin GetOrigin() const;
|
||||
@@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the help event origin, only used internally by wxWidgets normally.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOrigin(wxHelpEvent::Origin origin);
|
||||
@@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the update mode is initially wxIDLE_PROCESS_ALL. You can change the mode
|
||||
to only send idle events to windows with the wxWS_EX_PROCESS_IDLE extra window
|
||||
style set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CanSend(wxWindow* window);
|
||||
@@ -1796,7 +1796,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more
|
||||
processing time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see RequestMore()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MoreRequested() const;
|
||||
@@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ public:
|
||||
during OnIdle, then the application will remain in a passive event loop (not
|
||||
calling OnIdle) until a
|
||||
new event is posted to the application by the windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see MoreRequested()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RequestMore(bool needMore = true);
|
||||
@@ -2221,10 +2221,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function posts an event to be processed later.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to add to process queue.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The difference between sending an event (using the ProcessEvent
|
||||
method) and posting it is that in the first case the
|
||||
event is processed before the function returns, while
|
||||
@@ -2240,7 +2240,7 @@ public:
|
||||
type. This
|
||||
is an alternative to the use of static event tables. See the 'event' or the old
|
||||
'dynamic' sample for usage.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier (or first of the identifier range) to be
|
||||
associated with the event handler function. For the version not taking this
|
||||
@@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ public:
|
||||
added
|
||||
using the Connect() method. There is no way
|
||||
to disconnect functions connected using the (static) event tables.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier (or first of the identifier range) associated with the event
|
||||
handler function.
|
||||
@@ -2317,32 +2317,32 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets user-supplied client data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, any extra data the programmer wishes to associate with
|
||||
the object should be made available by deriving a new
|
||||
class with new data members.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get a pointer to the user-supplied client data object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event handler is enabled, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEvtHandlerEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEvtHandlerEnabled();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the pointer to the next handler in the chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNextHandler(), GetPreviousHandler(),
|
||||
SetPreviousHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
@@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the pointer to the previous handler in the chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPreviousHandler(), GetNextHandler(),
|
||||
SetNextHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
@@ -2361,18 +2361,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Processes an event, searching event tables and calling zero or more suitable
|
||||
event handler function(s).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to process.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if a suitable event handler function was found and
|
||||
executed, and the function did not call wxEvent::Skip.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, your application would not call this function: it is
|
||||
called in the wxWidgets implementation to dispatch
|
||||
incoming user interface events to the framework (and
|
||||
application).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SearchEventTable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
@@ -2382,13 +2382,13 @@ public:
|
||||
and handles any exceptions that occur in the process. If an exception is
|
||||
thrown in event handler, wxApp::OnExceptionInMainLoop
|
||||
is called.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to process.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the event was processed, @false if no handler was found
|
||||
or an exception was thrown.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxWindow::HandleWindowEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SafelyProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
@@ -2397,18 +2397,18 @@ public:
|
||||
Searches the event table, executing an event handler function if an appropriate
|
||||
one
|
||||
is found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param table
|
||||
Event table to be searched.
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to be matched against an event table entry.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if a suitable event handler function was found and
|
||||
executed, and the function did not call wxEvent::Skip.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This function looks through the object's event table and tries
|
||||
to find an entry that will match the event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ProcessEvent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool SearchEventTable(wxEventTable& table,
|
||||
@@ -2416,47 +2416,47 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets user-supplied client data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
Data to be associated with the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, any extra data the programmer wishes to associate with
|
||||
the object should be made available by deriving a new
|
||||
class with new data members. You must not call this
|
||||
method and SetClientObject on the same class - only one
|
||||
of them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClientData(void* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the client data object. Any previous object will be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClientObject(wxClientData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Enables or disables the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param enabled
|
||||
@true if the event handler is to be enabled, @false if it is to be disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You can use this function to avoid having to remove the event
|
||||
handler from the chain, for example when implementing a
|
||||
dialog editor and changing from edit to test mode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEvtHandlerEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEvtHandlerEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the pointer to the next handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param handler
|
||||
Event handler to be set as the next handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetNextHandler(), SetPreviousHandler(),
|
||||
GetPreviousHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
@@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the pointer to the previous handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param handler
|
||||
Event handler to be set as the previous handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -2767,7 +2767,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the cursor specified by this event is a valid cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You cannot specify wxNullCursor with this event, as it is not
|
||||
considered a valid cursor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens a file with the given file pointer, which has already been opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
read.
|
||||
Also note that this method may only be called for opened files and may crash if
|
||||
the file is not opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Eof() const;
|
||||
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@c ferror() function.
|
||||
Please note that this method may only be called for opened files and may crash
|
||||
if the file is not opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads the specified number of bytes into a buffer, returning the actual number
|
||||
read.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param buffer
|
||||
A buffer to receive the data.
|
||||
@param count
|
||||
The number of bytes to read.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The number of bytes read.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t Read(void* buffer, size_t count);
|
||||
@@ -140,20 +140,20 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
)
|
||||
Reads the entire contents of the file into a string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param str
|
||||
String to read data into.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
Conversion object to use in Unicode build; by default supposes
|
||||
that file contents is encoded in UTF-8.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if file was read successfully, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadAll(wxString* str);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position and returns @true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Offset to seek to.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes before the end of the
|
||||
file
|
||||
and returns @true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Number of bytes before the end of the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Associates the file with the given file descriptor, which has already been
|
||||
opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
@@ -275,12 +275,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Offset to seek to.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
One of wxFromStart, wxFromEnd, wxFromCurrent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on
|
||||
failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -291,10 +291,10 @@ public:
|
||||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes relative to the end of
|
||||
the file. For example, @c SeekEnd(-5) would position the pointer 5
|
||||
bytes before the end.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Number of bytes before the end of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on
|
||||
failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
|
||||
)
|
||||
Read the config data from the specified stream instead of the associated file,
|
||||
as usual.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Save()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileConfig(wxInputStream& is);
|
||||
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public:
|
||||
after saving it successfully, the dirty flag is reset so no changes will be
|
||||
written back to the file this object is associated with until you change its
|
||||
contents again.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfigBase::Flush
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Save(wxOutputStream& os);
|
||||
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ public:
|
||||
some sensitive information, such as passwords), you could use
|
||||
@c SetUmask(0077).
|
||||
This function doesn't do anything on non-Unix platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxCHANGE_UMASK()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUmask(int mode);
|
||||
|
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Initial size.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ public:
|
||||
function should only be used with the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE
|
||||
style,
|
||||
use GetFilename() for the others.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks filenames is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames) const;
|
||||
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Fills the array @a paths with the full paths of the files chosen. This
|
||||
function should be used with the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE style,
|
||||
use GetPath() otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks paths is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths) const;
|
||||
@@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets(changes) the current directory displayed in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true on success, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetDirectory(const wxString& directory);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects a certain file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true on success, @false otherwise
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetFilename(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
|
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ class wxFileDialog : public wxDialog
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
|
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Makes this object refer to the current working directory on the specified
|
||||
volume (or current volume if @a volume is empty).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCwd()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AssignCwd(const wxString& volume = wxEmptyString);
|
||||
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the extension from the file name resulting in a
|
||||
file name with no trailing dot.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExt(), SetEmptyExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClearExt();
|
||||
@@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ public:
|
||||
If @a fileTemp is @NULL, the file is only created, but not opened.
|
||||
Under Unix, the temporary file will have read and write permissions for the
|
||||
owner only to minimize the security problems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param prefix
|
||||
Prefix to use for the temporary file name construction
|
||||
@param fileTemp
|
||||
The file to open or @NULL to just get the name
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The full temporary file name or an empty string on error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CreateTempFileName(const wxString& prefix,
|
||||
@@ -202,37 +202,37 @@ public:
|
||||
These functions allow to examine and modify the individual directories of the
|
||||
path:
|
||||
AppendDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
InsertDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDirCount()
|
||||
PrependDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveLastDir()
|
||||
To change the components of the file name individually you can use the
|
||||
following functions:
|
||||
GetExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVolume()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasVolume()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ClearExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetEmptyExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetVolume()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -240,21 +240,21 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
You can initialize a wxFileName instance using one of the following functions:
|
||||
@ref wxfilename() "wxFileName constructors"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Assign()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignCwd()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignHomeDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref assigntempfilename() AssignHomeTempFileName
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DirName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FileName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatorassign() "operator ="
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -300,13 +300,13 @@ public:
|
||||
or @ref operatorequal() "operator ==".
|
||||
For testing basic access modes, you can use:
|
||||
IsDirWritable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDirReadable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileWritable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileReadable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileExecutable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the file with this name exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DirExists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool FileExists();
|
||||
@@ -332,10 +332,10 @@ public:
|
||||
Retrieves the value of the current working directory on the specified volume. If
|
||||
the volume is empty, the program's current working directory is returned for the
|
||||
current volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The string containing the current working directory or an empty
|
||||
string on error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AssignCwd()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetCwd(const wxString& volume = "");
|
||||
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the name part of the filename (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
@@ -422,15 +422,15 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the path part of the filename (without the name or extension). The
|
||||
possible flags values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPATH_GET_VOLUME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Return the path with the volume (does
|
||||
nothing for the filename formats without volumes), otherwise the path without
|
||||
volume part is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Return the path with the trailing
|
||||
separator, if this flag is not given there will be no separator at the end of
|
||||
the path.
|
||||
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@c wxPATH_DOS there is only one path separator anyhow, but for DOS there
|
||||
are two of them and the native one, i.e. the backslash is returned by this
|
||||
method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPathSeparators()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxChar GetPathSeparator(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
@@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
|
||||
formats but @c wxPATH_DOS this string contains only one character but for
|
||||
DOS and Windows both @c '/' and @c '\' may be used as
|
||||
separators.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPathSeparator()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetPathSeparators(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
@@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ public:
|
||||
file specified by GetFullPath().
|
||||
Any of the pointers may be @NULL if the corresponding time is not
|
||||
needed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true on success, @false if we failed to retrieve the times.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTimes(wxDateTime* dtAccess, wxDateTime* dtMod,
|
||||
@@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Make the file name absolute. This is a shortcut for
|
||||
@c wxFileName::Normalize(wxPATH_NORM_DOTS | wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE |
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_TILDE, cwd, format).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see MakeRelativeTo(), Normalize(), IsAbsolute()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MakeAbsolute(const wxString& cwd = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
@@ -670,22 +670,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function tries to put this file name in a form relative to
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pathBase.
|
||||
In other words, it returns the file name which should be used to access this
|
||||
file if the current directory were pathBase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
pathBase
|
||||
the directory to use as root, current directory is used by
|
||||
default
|
||||
@param format
|
||||
the file name format, native by default
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the file name has been changed, @false if we failed to do
|
||||
anything with it (currently this only happens if the
|
||||
file name is on a volume different from the volume
|
||||
specified by pathBase).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Normalize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MakeRelativeTo(const wxString& pathBase = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
@@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ public:
|
||||
if the flags contain wxPATH_MKDIR_FULL flag,
|
||||
try to create each directory in the path and also don't return an error
|
||||
if the target directory already exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if the directory was successfully created, @false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -714,106 +714,106 @@ public:
|
||||
Normalize the path. With the default flags value, the path will be
|
||||
made absolute, without any ".." and "." and all environment
|
||||
variables will be expanded in it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
The kind of normalization to do with the file name. It can be
|
||||
any or-combination of the following constants:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ENV_VARS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
replace env vars with their values
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_DOTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
squeeze all .. and . when possible; if there are too many .. and thus they
|
||||
cannot be all removed, @false will be returned
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_CASE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
if filesystem is case insensitive, transform to lower case
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
make the path absolute prepending cwd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_LONG
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
make the path the long form
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_SHORTCUT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
resolve if it is a shortcut (Windows only)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_TILDE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
replace ~ and ~user (Unix only)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ALL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
all of previous flags except wxPATH_NORM_CASE
|
||||
@param cwd
|
||||
If not empty, this directory will be used instead of current
|
||||
working directory in normalization (see wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE).
|
||||
@param format
|
||||
The file name format to use when processing the paths, native by default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if normalization was successfully or @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Normalize(int flags = wxPATH_NORM_ALL,
|
||||
@@ -827,15 +827,15 @@ public:
|
||||
one day (so it is really the access date and not time). The access time may be
|
||||
updated when the file is executed or not depending on the platform.
|
||||
GetModificationTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTimes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTimes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Touch()
|
||||
Other file system operations functions are:
|
||||
Mkdir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Rmdir()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the specified directory component from the path.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDirCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RemoveDir(size_t pos);
|
||||
@@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the extension of the file name to be an empty extension.
|
||||
This is different from having no extension at all as the file
|
||||
name will have a trailing dot after a call to this method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExt(), ClearExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEmptyExt();
|
||||
@@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ public:
|
||||
as the extension will remove the extension resulting in a file
|
||||
name without a trailing dot, unlike a call to
|
||||
SetEmptyExt().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEmptyExt(), ClearExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExt(const wxString& ext);
|
||||
@@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the name part (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
@@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Splits the given @a fullpath into the volume part (which may be empty) and
|
||||
the pure path part, not containing any volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SplitPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SplitVolume(const wxString& fullpath,
|
||||
|
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@b Caution! Unless @a is_dir is @true the @a location parameter
|
||||
is not the directory name but the name of the file in this directory. All these
|
||||
commands change the path to "dir/subdir/":
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param location
|
||||
the new location. Its meaning depends on the value of is_dir
|
||||
@param is_dir
|
||||
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Converts filename into URL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see URLToFileName(), wxFileName
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString FileNameToURL(wxFileName filename);
|
||||
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@e path. If the file is found in any directory, returns @true and the full
|
||||
path of the file in @e str, otherwise returns @false and doesn't modify
|
||||
@e str.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param str
|
||||
Receives the full path of the file, must not be @NULL
|
||||
@param path
|
||||
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
||||
absolute path. Note that the user is responsible for deleting the returned
|
||||
wxFSFile.
|
||||
@a flags can be one or more of the following bit values ored together:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A stream opened with just the default @e wxFS_READ flag may
|
||||
or may not be seekable depending on the underlying source.
|
||||
Passing @e wxFS_READ | wxFS_SEEKABLE for @a flags will
|
||||
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ class wxFSFile : public wxObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. You probably won't use it. See Notes for details.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The input stream that will be used to access data
|
||||
@param location
|
||||
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns anchor (if present). The term of @b anchor can be easily
|
||||
explained using few examples:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Usually an anchor is presented only if the MIME type is 'text/html'.
|
||||
But it may have some meaning with other files;
|
||||
for example myanim.avi#200 may refer to position in animation
|
||||
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
|
||||
check whether the file exists or not, it only checks if it knows the protocol.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Must be overridden in derived handlers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
|
||||
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file and returns wxFSFile pointer or @NULL if failed.
|
||||
Must be overridden in derived handlers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param fs
|
||||
Parent FS (the FS from that OpenFile was called). See ZIP handler
|
||||
for details of how to use it.
|
||||
|
554
interface/font.h
554
interface/font.h
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a font object with the specified attributes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pointSize
|
||||
Size in points.
|
||||
@param pixelSize
|
||||
@@ -53,123 +53,123 @@ public:
|
||||
@param family
|
||||
Font family, a generic way of referring to fonts without specifying actual
|
||||
facename. One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Chooses a default font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A decorative font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A formal, serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A handwriting font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sans-serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A fixed pitch font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A teletype font.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
One of wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT and wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC.
|
||||
@param weight
|
||||
Font weight, sometimes also referred to as font boldness. One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Normal font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Light font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bold font.
|
||||
@param underline
|
||||
The value can be @true or @false. At present this has an effect on Windows
|
||||
@@ -180,75 +180,75 @@ public:
|
||||
a default typeface will be chosen based on the family.
|
||||
@param encoding
|
||||
An encoding which may be one of
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default system encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default application encoding: this
|
||||
is the encoding set by calls to
|
||||
SetDefaultEncoding and which may be set to,
|
||||
say, KOI8 to create all fonts by default with KOI8 encoding. Initially, the
|
||||
default application encoding is the same as default system encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1...15
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ISO8859 encodings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_KOI8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The standard Russian encoding for Internet.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_CP1250...1252
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Windows encodings similar to ISO8859 (but not identical).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If the specified encoding isn't available, no font is created
|
||||
(see also font encoding overview).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the desired font does not exist, the closest match will be
|
||||
chosen. Under Windows, only scalable TrueType fonts are
|
||||
used.
|
||||
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Destructor.
|
||||
See @ref overview_refcountdestruct "reference-counted object destruction" for
|
||||
more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Although all remaining fonts are deleted when the application
|
||||
exits, the application should try to clean up all fonts
|
||||
itself. This is because wxWidgets cannot know if a
|
||||
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current application's default encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxfontencodingoverview, SetDefaultEncoding()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontEncoding GetDefaultEncoding();
|
||||
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the typeface name associated with the font, or the empty string if
|
||||
there is no
|
||||
typeface information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFaceName() const;
|
||||
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font family. See SetFamily() for a list of valid
|
||||
family identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontFamily GetFamily() const;
|
||||
@@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that the returned string is not meant to be shown or edited by the user: a
|
||||
typical
|
||||
use of this function is for serializing in string-form a wxFont object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo(),GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc() const;
|
||||
@@ -320,14 +320,14 @@ public:
|
||||
non-empty.
|
||||
Some examples of the formats of returned strings (which are platform-dependent)
|
||||
are in SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetNativeFontInfoDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the point size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPointSize() const;
|
||||
@@ -335,14 +335,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font style. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
styles.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStyle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the font is underlined, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUnderlined() const;
|
||||
@@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font weight. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
weight identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontWeight GetWeight() const;
|
||||
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the default font encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxfontencodingoverview, GetDefaultEncoding()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetDefaultEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding);
|
||||
@@ -406,106 +406,106 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the facename for the font.
|
||||
Returns @true if the given face name exists; @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param faceName
|
||||
A valid facename, which should be on the end-user's system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks To avoid portability problems, don't rely on a specific face,
|
||||
but specify the font family instead or as well. A
|
||||
suitable font will be found on the end-user's system.
|
||||
If both the family and the facename are specified,
|
||||
wxWidgets will first search for the specific face, and
|
||||
then for a font belonging to the same family.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFaceName(), SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetFaceName(const wxString& faceName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font family.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param family
|
||||
One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Chooses a default font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A decorative font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A formal, serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A handwriting font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sans-serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A fixed pitch font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A teletype font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFamily(), SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFamily(wxFontFamily family);
|
||||
@@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ public:
|
||||
invalid, font is unchanged. This function is typically used for de-serializing
|
||||
a wxFont
|
||||
object previously saved in a string-form.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeFontInfo(const wxString& info);
|
||||
@@ -531,101 +531,101 @@ public:
|
||||
Unlike SetNativeFontInfo(), this function accepts
|
||||
strings which are user-friendly.
|
||||
Examples of accepted string formats are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Generic syntax
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Example
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxGTK2: @c [FACE-NAME] [bold] [oblique|italic] [POINTSIZE]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Monospace bold 10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxMSW: @c [light|bold] [italic] [FACE-NAME] [POINTSIZE] [ENCODING]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Tahoma 10 WINDOWS-1252
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxMac: FIXME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FIXME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For more detailed information about the allowed syntaxes you can look at the
|
||||
documentation of the native API used for font-rendering (e.g. pango_font_description_from_string).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc(const wxString& info);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the point size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pointSize
|
||||
Size in points.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPointSize(int pointSize);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
One of wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT and wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetStyle(int style);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets underlining.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param underlining
|
||||
@true to underline, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUnderlined(const bool underlined);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font weight.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param weight
|
||||
One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Normal font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Light font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bold font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetWeight(wxFontWeight weight);
|
||||
|
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current font mapper object. If there is no current object, creates
|
||||
one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Set()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontMapper* Get();
|
||||
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return internal string identifier for the encoding (see also
|
||||
wxFontMapper::GetEncodingDescription)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEncodingFromName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetEncodingName(wxFontEncoding encoding);
|
||||
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Set the current font mapper object and return previous one (may be @NULL).
|
||||
This method is only useful if you want to plug-in an alternative font mapper
|
||||
into wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Get()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontMapper* Set(wxFontMapper* mapper);
|
||||
|
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent. This may be @NULL. If it is non-@NULL, the frame will
|
||||
always be displayed on top of the parent window on Windows.
|
||||
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ public:
|
||||
item,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks For Motif, MWM (the Motif Window Manager) should be running for
|
||||
any window styles to work (otherwise all styles take
|
||||
effect).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFrame();
|
||||
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Centres the frame on the display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param direction
|
||||
The parameter may be wxHORIZONTAL, wxVERTICAL or wxBOTH.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a status bar at the bottom of the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The number of fields to create. Specify a
|
||||
value greater than 1 to create a multi-field status bar.
|
||||
@@ -167,14 +167,14 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The status bar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the status bar if it was created successfully, @NULL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The width of the status bar is the whole width of the frame
|
||||
(adjusted automatically when resizing), and the height
|
||||
and text size are chosen by the host windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStatusText(), OnCreateStatusBar(), GetStatusBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxStatusBar* CreateStatusBar(int number = 1,
|
||||
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a toolbar at the top or left of the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The toolbar style. See wxToolBar for a list
|
||||
of valid styles.
|
||||
@@ -193,15 +193,15 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The toolbar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the toolbar if it was created successfully, @NULL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks By default, the toolbar is an instance of wxToolBar (which is
|
||||
defined to be a suitable toolbar class on each
|
||||
platform, such as wxToolBar95). To use a different
|
||||
class, override OnCreateToolBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), OnCreateToolBar(), SetToolBar(),
|
||||
GetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the menubar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuBar* GetMenuBar() const;
|
||||
@@ -225,28 +225,28 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the status bar currently associated with the frame (if
|
||||
any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxStatusBar* GetStatusBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the status bar pane used to display menu and toolbar help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStatusBarPane()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStatusBarPane();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the toolbar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar, SetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a status bar is requested by CreateStatusBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The number of fields to create.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
@@ -257,13 +257,13 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A status bar object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks An application can override this function to return a different
|
||||
kind of status bar. The default implementation returns
|
||||
an instance of wxStatusBar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxStatusBar* OnCreateStatusBar(int number, long style,
|
||||
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a toolbar is requested by CreateToolBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The toolbar style. See wxToolBar for a list
|
||||
of valid styles.
|
||||
@@ -281,13 +281,13 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The toolbar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A toolbar object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks An application can override this function to return a different
|
||||
kind of toolbar. The default implementation returns an
|
||||
instance of wxToolBar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxToolBar* OnCreateToolBar(long style, wxWindowID id,
|
||||
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Simulate a menu command.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier for a menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -314,22 +314,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tells the frame to show the given menu bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param menuBar
|
||||
The menu bar to associate with the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the frame is destroyed, the menu bar and its menus will be
|
||||
destroyed also, so do not delete the menu bar
|
||||
explicitly (except by resetting the frame's menu bar to
|
||||
another frame or @NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMenuBar(wxMenuBar* menuBar);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Associates a status bar with the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar, GetStatusBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetStatusBar(wxStatusBar* statusBar);
|
||||
@@ -342,21 +342,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the status bar text and redraws the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
The text for the status field.
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The status field (starting from zero).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use an empty string to clear the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetStatusText(const wxString& text, int number = 0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the widths of the fields in the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The number of fields in the status bar. It must be the
|
||||
same used in CreateStatusBar.
|
||||
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ public:
|
||||
least one
|
||||
field must be -1. You should delete this array after calling
|
||||
SetStatusWidths.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The widths of the variable fields are calculated from the total
|
||||
width of all fields, minus the sum of widths of the
|
||||
non-variable fields, divided by the number of variable
|
||||
|
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that you must use a @a type value (aka image format)
|
||||
that wxWidgets can save (e.g. JPG, PNG, see wxImage
|
||||
documentation())!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddFileWithMimeType()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, wxImage& image,
|
||||
@@ -96,9 +96,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Like AddFile(), but lets you explicitly
|
||||
specify added file's MIME type. This version should be used whenever you know
|
||||
the MIME type, because it makes accessing the files faster.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.5}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddFile()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddFileWithMimeType(const wxString& filename,
|
||||
|
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Window parent.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Gauge style. See wxGauge.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGauge();
|
||||
@@ -94,32 +94,32 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the width of the 3D bezel face.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (returns 0) for most platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBezelFace() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the 3D shadow margin width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (returns 0) for most platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetShadowWidth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetShadowWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetValue() const;
|
||||
@@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 3D bezel face width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (doesn't do anything) for most
|
||||
platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetBezelFace(int width);
|
||||
@@ -152,14 +152,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the range (maximum value) of the gauge.
|
||||
This function makes the gauge switch to determinate mode, if it's not already.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRange(int range);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 3D shadow width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (doesn't do anything) for most
|
||||
platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -170,10 +170,10 @@ public:
|
||||
range as returned by GetRange(), inclusive.
|
||||
This function makes the gauge switch to determinate mode, if it was in
|
||||
indeterminate mode before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
Position for the gauge level.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(int pos);
|
||||
|
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ class wxGLContext : public wxObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The canvas that is used to initialize this context. This parameter is
|
||||
needed only temporarily,
|
||||
@@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Creates a window with the given parameters. Notice that you need to create and
|
||||
use a wxGLContext to output to this window.
|
||||
If
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param attribList is not specified, double buffered RGBA mode is used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
parent
|
||||
Pointer to a parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines if a canvas having the specified attributes is available.
|
||||
Returns @true if attributes are supported.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param attribList
|
||||
See attribList for wxGLCanvas().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ class wxGraphicsPath : public wxGraphicsObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddArc(wxDouble x, wxDouble y, wxDouble r,
|
||||
wxDouble startAngle,
|
||||
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddCurveToPoint(wxDouble cx1, wxDouble cy1, wxDouble cx2,
|
||||
wxDouble cy2,
|
||||
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddLineToPoint(wxDouble x, wxDouble y);
|
||||
void AddLineToPoint(const wxPoint2DDouble& p);
|
||||
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a wxWindow.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGraphicsRenderer:: CreateContext
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsContext* Create(const wxWindowDC& dc);
|
||||
@@ -242,9 +242,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native context. This native context must be
|
||||
eg a CGContextRef for Core Graphics, a Graphics pointer for GDIPlus or a
|
||||
cairo_t pointer for cairo.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGraphicsRenderer:: CreateContextFromNativeContext
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsContext* CreateFromNative(void* context);
|
||||
@@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ class wxGraphicsMatrix : public wxGraphicsObject
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Concat(const wxGraphicsMatrix* t);
|
||||
void Concat(const wxGraphicsMatrix& t);
|
||||
|
296
interface/grid.h
296
interface/grid.h
@@ -70,27 +70,27 @@ class wxGridTableBase : public wxObject
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridTableBase();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxGridTableBase();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AppendCols(size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AppendRows(size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanGetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -101,22 +101,22 @@ public:
|
||||
bool CanHaveAttributes();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanSetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Clear();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DeleteCols(size_t pos = 0, size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DeleteRows(size_t pos = 0, size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -132,12 +132,12 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellAttrProvider* GetAttrProvider() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberCols();
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetNumberRows();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetRowLabelValue(int row);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -157,12 +157,12 @@ public:
|
||||
wxString GetTypeName(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetValue(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValueAsBool(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -173,32 +173,32 @@ public:
|
||||
const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetValueAsDouble(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetValueAsLong(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGrid* GetView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertCols(size_t pos = 0, size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertRows(size_t pos = 0, size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmptyCell(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetAttrProvider(wxGridCellAttrProvider* attrProvider);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetColLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRowAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int row);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -234,28 +234,28 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetRowLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(int row, int col, const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsBool(int row, int col, bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsCustom(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName,
|
||||
void* value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsDouble(int row, int col, double value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsLong(int row, int col, long value);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetView(wxGrid* grid);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateAttrCols(size_t pos, int numCols);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ class wxGridCellEditor
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor();
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void HandleReturn(wxKeyEvent& event);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCreated();
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ class wxGridEditorCreatedEvent : public wxCommandEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridEditorCreatedEvent();
|
||||
wxGridEditorCreatedEvent(int id, wxEventType type,
|
||||
@@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ class wxGridRangeSelectEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridRangeSelectEvent();
|
||||
wxGridRangeSelectEvent(int id, wxEventType type,
|
||||
@@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ class wxGridCellRenderer
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ class wxGridSizeEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridSizeEvent();
|
||||
wxGridSizeEvent(int id, wxEventType type, wxObject* obj,
|
||||
@@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DecRef();
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -827,52 +827,52 @@ public:
|
||||
void GetAlignment(int* hAlign, int* vAlign) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetEditor(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetRenderer(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasAlignment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasEditor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void IncRef();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -906,12 +906,12 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetBackgroundColour(const wxColour& colBack);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDefAttr(wxGridCellAttr* defAttr);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEditor(wxGridCellEditor* editor);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetFont(const wxFont& font);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReadOnly(bool isReadOnly = true);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ class wxGridEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridEvent();
|
||||
wxGridEvent(int id, wxEventType type, wxObject* obj,
|
||||
@@ -1205,25 +1205,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
AutoSizeColumn()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRow()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeColumns()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRows()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColMinimalWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowMinimalHeight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColMinimalAcceptableWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColMinimalAcceptableWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1236,7 +1236,7 @@ public:
|
||||
EndBatch(). Code that does a lot of grid
|
||||
modification can be enclosed between BeginBatch and EndBatch calls to avoid
|
||||
screen flicker. The final EndBatch will cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGridUpdateLocker
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void BeginBatch();
|
||||
@@ -1296,29 +1296,29 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableDragRowSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragColSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragRowSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragColSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragColMove()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragColMove()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragGridSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragGridSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColAt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColPos()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColPos()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragCell()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragCell()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1348,11 +1348,11 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxGrid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxGrid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CreateGrid()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1371,23 +1371,23 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
MoveCursorUp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorDown()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorLeft()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorRight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorPageUp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorPageDown()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorUpBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorDownBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorLeftBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorRightBlock()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ public:
|
||||
EndBatch. Code that does a lot of grid modification can be enclosed between
|
||||
BeginBatch and EndBatch calls to avoid screen flicker. The final EndBatch will
|
||||
cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGridUpdateLocker
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndBatch();
|
||||
@@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ public:
|
||||
grid cell at the specified location.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetCellAlignment(int row, int col, int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the current column label alignment values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetColLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColLeft(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetColPos(int colID) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColRight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1662,7 +1662,7 @@ public:
|
||||
values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetDefaultCellAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@@ -1702,14 +1702,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(const wxGridCellCoords& c) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the pen used for grid lines. This virtual function may be overridden in
|
||||
derived classes in order to change the appearance of grid lines. Note that
|
||||
currently the pen width must be 1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetColGridLinePen(), GetRowGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPen GetDefaultGridLinePen();
|
||||
@@ -1731,12 +1731,12 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used for grid lines.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetGridLineColour() const;
|
||||
@@ -1796,7 +1796,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetNumberRows() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* GetOrCreateCellAttr(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the current row label alignment values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxLEFT, wxCENTRE or wxRIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxTOP, wxCENTRE or wxBOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetRowLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
@@ -1838,7 +1838,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalHeight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1849,14 +1849,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineY() const;
|
||||
@@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionForeground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1915,17 +1915,17 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableGridLines()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GridLinesEnabled()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetGridLineColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetGridLineColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowGridLinePen()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2149,57 +2149,57 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
SetRowLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetUseNativeColLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HideColLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HideRowLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelFont()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelTextColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelBackgroundColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelFont()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelBackgroundColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelTextColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelTextOrientation()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelTextOrientation()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2249,15 +2249,15 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
ClearSelection()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSelection()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectAll()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectCol()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectRow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2274,7 +2274,7 @@ public:
|
||||
location.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment should be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment should be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCellBackgroundColour(int row, int col,
|
||||
const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
@@ -2539,7 +2539,7 @@ public:
|
||||
int SetOrCalcColumnSizes(bool calcOnly, bool setAsMin = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int SetOrCalcRowSizes(bool calcOnly, bool setAsMin = true);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
Sometimes wxGrid has trouble setting the scrollbars correctly due to rounding
|
||||
errors: setting this to 1 can help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetScrollLineX(int x);
|
||||
@@ -2628,24 +2628,24 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
Sometimes wxGrid has trouble setting the scrollbars correctly due to rounding
|
||||
errors: setting this to 1 can help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetScrollLineY(int y);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelectionBackground(const wxColour& c);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelectionForeground(const wxColour& c);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the selection behaviour of the grid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param wxGridSelectCells()
|
||||
The default mode where individual cells are selected.
|
||||
@param wxGridSelectRows()
|
||||
|
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@e WinHelp, MS HTML Help @a sectionNo is a context id.
|
||||
@e External HTML help: wxExtHelpController implements @a sectionNo as an id in
|
||||
a map file, which is of the form:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@e wxHtmlHelpController: @a sectionNo is an identifier as specified in the @c
|
||||
.hhc file. See @ref overview_helpformat "Help files format".
|
||||
See also the help sample for notes on how to specify section numbers for
|
||||
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController returns the frame, size and position.
|
||||
For all other help controllers, this function does nothing
|
||||
and just returns @NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param viewer
|
||||
This defaults to "netscape" for wxExtHelpController.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
|
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground allows to
|
||||
change the selection background for all cells at once and doing anything more
|
||||
fancy is probably going to look strangely.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextBgColour(const wxColour& colBg) const;
|
||||
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
||||
look inside selection. By default all original colours are completely ignored
|
||||
and the standard, system-dependent, selection colour is used but the program
|
||||
may wish to override this to achieve some custom appearance.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextBgColour(),
|
||||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground, wxSystemSettings::GetColour
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -117,12 +117,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user clicks on hypertext link. Does nothing by default.
|
||||
Overloading this method is deprecated; intercept the event instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Index of the item containing the link.
|
||||
@param link
|
||||
Description of the link.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see See also wxHtmlLinkInfo.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void OnLinkClicked(size_t n, const wxHtmlLinkInfo& link);
|
||||
|
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ class wxHyperlinkCtrl : public wxControl
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the hyperlink control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
232
interface/icon.h
232
interface/icon.h
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from the specified location().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bits
|
||||
Specifies an array of pixel values.
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
@@ -66,68 +66,68 @@ public:
|
||||
wxIconLocation.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
May be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon from the resource database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a GIF bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an XPM bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWidgets
|
||||
configuration.
|
||||
If all possible wxWidgets settings are used, the Windows platform supports
|
||||
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
XPM data, XPM file, and PNG file.
|
||||
Under wxMotif, the available formats are XBM data, XBM file, XPM data, XPM
|
||||
file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The first form constructs an icon object with no data; an
|
||||
assignment or another member function such as Create or
|
||||
LoadFile must be called subsequently.
|
||||
@@ -168,9 +168,9 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copies @a bmp bitmap to this icon. Under MS Windows the bitmap
|
||||
must have mask colour set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LoadFile()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Wx::Icon-new( width, height, depth = -1 )
|
||||
Wx::Icon-new( name, type, desiredWidth = -1, desiredHeight = -1 )
|
||||
Wx::Icon-newFromBits( bits, width, height, depth = 1 )
|
||||
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width of the icon in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
@@ -203,86 +203,86 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from a file or resource.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Either a filename or a Windows resource name.
|
||||
The meaning of name is determined by the type parameter.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
One of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon from the resource database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a GIF bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an XPM bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWidgets
|
||||
configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxIcon()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LoadFile(const wxString& name, wxBitmapType type);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the depth member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param depth
|
||||
Icon depth.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the height member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
Icon height in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the width member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Icon width in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
Icon to assign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
1012
interface/image.h
1012
interface/image.h
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor specifying the image size, whether image masks should be created,
|
||||
and the initial size of the list.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Width of the images in the list.
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@true if masks should be created for all images.
|
||||
@param initialCount
|
||||
The initial size of the list.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImageList();
|
||||
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a new image using an icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bitmap
|
||||
Bitmap representing the opaque areas of the image.
|
||||
@param mask
|
||||
@@ -59,9 +59,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Colour indicating which parts of the image are transparent.
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
Icon to use as the image.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The new zero-based image index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The original bitmap or icon is not affected by the Add
|
||||
operation, and can be deleted afterwards.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a specified image onto a device context.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
Image index, starting from zero.
|
||||
@param dc
|
||||
@@ -90,50 +90,50 @@ public:
|
||||
Y position on the device context.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
How to draw the image. A bitlist of a selection of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxIMAGELIST_DRAW_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Draw the image normally.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxIMAGELIST_DRAW_TRANSPARENT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Draw the image with transparency.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxIMAGELIST_DRAW_SELECTED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Draw the image in selected state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxIMAGELIST_DRAW_FOCUSED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Draw the image in a focused state.
|
||||
@param solidBackground
|
||||
For optimisation - drawing can be faster if the function is told
|
||||
@@ -161,14 +161,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the size of the images in the list. Currently, the @a index
|
||||
parameter is ignored as all images in the list have the same size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
currently unused, should be 0
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
receives the width of the images in the list
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
receives the height of the images in the list
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the function succeeded, @false if it failed (for example,
|
||||
if the image list was not yet initialized).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -187,16 +187,16 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the existing image with the new image.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bitmap
|
||||
Bitmap representing the opaque areas of the image.
|
||||
@param mask
|
||||
Monochrome mask bitmap, representing the transparent areas of the image.
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
Icon to use as the image.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the replacement was successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The original bitmap or icon is not affected by the Replace
|
||||
operation, and can be deleted afterwards.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the information for the given language or @NULL if this language
|
||||
is unknown. Note that even if the returned pointer is valid, the caller should
|
||||
@e not delete it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLanguageInfo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxLanguageInfo* FindLanguageInfo(const wxString& locale);
|
||||
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ public:
|
||||
See GNU gettext manual for additional information on plural forms handling.
|
||||
This method is called by the wxGetTranslation()
|
||||
function and _() macro.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Domains are searched in the last to first order, i.e. catalogs
|
||||
added later override those added before.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The second form is deprecated, use the first one unless you know what you are
|
||||
doing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param language
|
||||
wxLanguage identifier of the locale.
|
||||
wxLANGUAGE_DEFAULT has special meaning -- wxLocale will use system's
|
||||
@@ -289,32 +289,32 @@ public:
|
||||
language (see GetSystemLanguage).
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
Combination of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLOCALE_LOAD_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load the message catalog
|
||||
for the given locale containing the translations of standard wxWidgets
|
||||
messages
|
||||
automatically.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLOCALE_CONV_ENCODING
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically convert message
|
||||
catalogs to platform's default encoding. Note that it will do only basic
|
||||
conversion between well-known pair like iso8859-1 and windows-1252 or
|
||||
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ public:
|
||||
FindLanguageInfo() to obtain its
|
||||
wxLanguageInfo structure. See AddLanguage() for
|
||||
the wxLanguageInfo description.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.1}.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool IsAvailable(int lang);
|
||||
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@c wxToupper_l()
|
||||
We hope to provide many more functions (covering numbers, time and formatted
|
||||
IO) in the near future.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxLocale
|
||||
*/
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the state of the specified joystick button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The button id to report, from 0 to GetNumberButtons() - 1
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the specified joystick axis.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param axis
|
||||
The joystick axis to report, from 0 to GetNumberAxes() - 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -239,25 +239,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Releases the capture set by @b SetCapture.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the capture release succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCapture(), wxJoystickEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReleaseCapture();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the capture to direct joystick events to @e win.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window that will receive joystick events.
|
||||
@param pollingFreq
|
||||
If zero, movement events are sent when above the
|
||||
threshold. If greater than zero, events are received every pollingFreq
|
||||
milliseconds.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the capture succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ReleaseCapture(), wxJoystickEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetCapture(wxWindow* win, int pollingFreq = 0);
|
||||
|
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructs a sash layout window, which can be a child of a frame, dialog or any
|
||||
other non-control window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Pointer to a parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes a sash layout window, which can be a child of a frame, dialog or
|
||||
any other non-control window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Pointer to a parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This macro can be used in conjunction with the wxFORCE_LINK_MODULE() macro
|
||||
to force the linker to include in its output a specific object file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In particular, you should use this macro in the source file which you want
|
||||
to force for inclusion. The @c moduleName needs to be a name not already in
|
||||
use in other wxFORCE_LINK_THIS_MODULE() macros, but is not required to be
|
||||
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This macro can be used in conjunction with the wxFORCE_LINK_THIS_MODULE()
|
||||
macro to force the linker to include in its output a specific object file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In particular, you should use this macro in a source file which you know
|
||||
for sure is linked in the output (e.g. the source file containing the
|
||||
@c main() of your app). The @c moduleName is the name of the module you
|
||||
|
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListBox();
|
||||
@@ -135,25 +135,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Deselects an item in the list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item to deselect.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This applies to multiple selection listboxes only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Deselect(int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fill an array of ints with the positions of the currently selected items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param selections
|
||||
A reference to an wxArrayInt instance that is used to store the result of
|
||||
the query.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The number of selections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use this with a multiple selection listbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxControlWithItems::GetSelection, wxControlWithItems::GetStringSelection,
|
||||
wxControlWithItems::SetSelection
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -162,14 +162,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the item located at @e point, or @c wxNOT_FOUND if there
|
||||
is no item located at @e point.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}. It is currently implemented
|
||||
for wxMSW, wxMac and wxGTK2
|
||||
ports.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param point
|
||||
Point of item (in client coordinates) to obtain
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Item located at point, or wxNOT_FOUND if unimplemented or the
|
||||
item does not exist.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Insert the given number of strings before the specified position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param nItems
|
||||
Number of items in the array items
|
||||
@param items
|
||||
@@ -196,10 +196,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines whether an item is selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the given item is selected, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSelected(int n) const;
|
||||
@@ -207,14 +207,14 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Clears the list box and adds the given strings to it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The number of strings to set.
|
||||
@param choices
|
||||
An array of strings to set.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Options array of client data pointers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You may free the array from the calling program after this
|
||||
function has been called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the specified item to be the first visible item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
|
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListCtrl();
|
||||
@@ -132,21 +132,21 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Arranges the items in icon or small icon view. This only has effect on Win32.
|
||||
@a flag is one of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_ALIGN_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default alignment.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_ALIGN_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Align to the left side of the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_ALIGN_TOP
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Align to the top side of the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_ALIGN_SNAP_TO_GRID
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Snap to grid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Arrange(int flag = wxLIST_ALIGN_DEFAULT);
|
||||
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ public:
|
||||
SetImageList, delete the list when destroyed). @a which is one of
|
||||
wxIMAGE_LIST_NORMAL, wxIMAGE_LIST_SMALL, wxIMAGE_LIST_STATE (the last is
|
||||
unimplemented).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetImageList()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AssignImageList(wxImageList* imageList, int which);
|
||||
@@ -216,14 +216,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Find an item nearest this position in the specified direction, starting from
|
||||
@a start or the beginning if @a start is -1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b FindItem( start, str, partial = @false )
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b FindItemData( start, data )
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b FindItemAtPos( start, point, direction )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long FindItem(long start, const wxString& str,
|
||||
@@ -282,17 +282,17 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the specified image list. @a which may be one of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxIMAGE_LIST_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The normal (large icon) image list.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxIMAGE_LIST_SMALL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The small icon image list.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxIMAGE_LIST_STATE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The user-defined state image list (unimplemented).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImageList* GetImageList(int which) const;
|
||||
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the colour for this item. If the item has no specific colour, returns
|
||||
an invalid colour (and not the default background control of the control
|
||||
itself).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetItemTextColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetItemBackgroundColour(long item) const;
|
||||
@@ -376,51 +376,51 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the first item with given state following @a item or -1 if
|
||||
no such item found.
|
||||
This function may be used to find all selected items in the control like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@a geometry can be one of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_NEXT_ABOVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Searches for an item above the specified item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_NEXT_ALL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Searches for subsequent item by index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_NEXT_BELOW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Searches for an item below the specified item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_NEXT_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Searches for an item to the left of the specified item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_NEXT_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Searches for an item to the right of the specified item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b NB: this parameter is only supported by wxMSW currently and ignored on
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
@a state can be a bitlist of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_DONTCARE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Don't care what the state is.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_DROPHILITED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item indicates it is a drop target.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_FOCUSED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item has the focus.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_SELECTED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item is selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_CUT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item is selected as part of a cut and paste operation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetNextItem(long item, int geometry = wxLIST_NEXT_ALL,
|
||||
@@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ public:
|
||||
for GetItemRect().
|
||||
@a code can be one of @c wxLIST_RECT_BOUNDS,
|
||||
@c wxLIST_RECT_ICON or @c wxLIST_RECT_LABEL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSubItemRect(long item, long subItem, wxRect& rect,
|
||||
@@ -472,48 +472,48 @@ public:
|
||||
giving details in @e flags. Returns index of the item or @c wxNOT_FOUND
|
||||
if no item is at the specified point.
|
||||
@a flags will be a combination of the following flags:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ABOVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Above the client area.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_BELOW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Below the client area.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_NOWHERE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In the client area but below the last item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMICON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On the bitmap associated with an item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMLABEL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On the label (string) associated with an item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In the area to the right of an item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMSTATEICON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On the state icon for a tree view item that is in a user-defined state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_TOLEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To the right of the client area.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_TORIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To the left of the client area.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Combination of wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMICON, wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMLABEL,
|
||||
wxLIST_HITTEST_ONITEMSTATEICON.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If @a ptrSubItem is not @NULL and the wxListCtrl is in the report
|
||||
mode the subitem (or column) number will also be provided.
|
||||
This feature is only available in version 2.7.0 or higher and is currently only
|
||||
@@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Insert an image/string item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param info
|
||||
wxListItem object
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxListCtrl will not delete the pointer or keep a reference of it. You can
|
||||
return the same wxListItemAttr pointer for every OnGetItemAttr call.
|
||||
The base class version always returns @NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnGetItemImage(), OnGetItemColumnImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ public:
|
||||
index for the given line and column.
|
||||
The base class version always calls OnGetItemImage for the first column, else
|
||||
it returns -1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnGetItemText(), OnGetItemImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemAttr()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ public:
|
||||
In a control with @c wxLC_REPORT style, OnGetItemImage only gets called for
|
||||
the first column of each line.
|
||||
The base class version always returns -1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnGetItemText(), OnGetItemColumnImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemAttr()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This function @b must be overloaded in the derived class for a control with
|
||||
@c wxLC_VIRTUAL style. It should return the string containing the text of
|
||||
the given @a column for the specified @c item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetItemCount(), OnGetItemImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemColumnImage(), OnGetItemAttr()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Redraws the given @e item. This is only useful for the virtual list controls
|
||||
as without calling this function the displayed value of the item doesn't change
|
||||
even when the underlying data does change.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see RefreshItems()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RefreshItem(long item);
|
||||
@@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ public:
|
||||
unimplemented).
|
||||
This method does not take ownership of the image list, you have to
|
||||
delete it yourself.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AssignImageList()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetImageList(wxImageList* imageList, int which);
|
||||
@@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ The m_stateMask and m_state members take flags from the following:
|
||||
be either an integer or a pointer cast to the @c wxUIntPtr type which is
|
||||
guaranteed to be large enough to be able to contain all integer types and
|
||||
pointers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.4}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetItemPtrData(long item, wxUIntPtr data);
|
||||
@@ -916,12 +916,12 @@ The m_stateMask and m_state members take flags from the following:
|
||||
Call this function to sort the items in the list control. Sorting is done
|
||||
using the specified @a fnSortCallBack function. This function must have the
|
||||
following prototype:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
It is called each time when the two items must be compared and should return 0
|
||||
if the items are equal, negative value if the first item is less than the
|
||||
second one and positive value if the first one is greater than the second one
|
||||
(the same convention as used by @c qsort(3)).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item1
|
||||
client data associated with the first item (NOT the index).
|
||||
@param item2
|
||||
@@ -1131,10 +1131,10 @@ class wxListView : public wxListCtrl
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Resets the column image -- after calling this function, no image will be shown.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param col
|
||||
the column to clear image for
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetColumnImage()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearColumnImage(int col);
|
||||
@@ -1148,14 +1148,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the first selected item in a (presumably) multiple selection control.
|
||||
Together with GetNextSelected() it can be
|
||||
used to iterate over all selected items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The first selected item, if any, -1 otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetFirstSelected() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently focused item or -1 if none.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsSelected(), Focus()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetFocusedItem() const;
|
||||
@@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Used together with GetFirstSelected() to
|
||||
iterate over all selected items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the next selected item or -1 if there are no more of
|
||||
them.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -1172,19 +1172,19 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the item with the given @a index is selected,
|
||||
@false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFirstSelected(), GetNextSelected()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSelected(long index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects or unselects the given item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
the item to select or unselect
|
||||
@param on
|
||||
if @true (default), selects the item, otherwise unselects it
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxListCtrl::SetItemState
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Select(bool on = true);
|
||||
@@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the column image for the specified column. To use the column images, the
|
||||
control must have a valid image list with at least one image.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param col
|
||||
the column to set image for
|
||||
@param image
|
||||
@@ -1266,29 +1266,29 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a bit mask indicating which fields of the structure are valid;
|
||||
can be any combination of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_MASK_STATE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetState is valid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_MASK_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetText is valid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_MASK_IMAGE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetImage is valid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_MASK_DATA
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetData is valid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_MASK_WIDTH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetWidth is valid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_MASK_FORMAT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetFormat is valid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetMask() const;
|
||||
@@ -1296,25 +1296,25 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a bit field representing the state of the item. Can be any
|
||||
combination of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_DONTCARE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Don't care what the state is. Win32 only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_DROPHILITED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item is highlighted to receive a drop event. Win32 only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_FOCUSED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item has the focus.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_SELECTED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item is selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxLIST_STATE_CUT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The item is in the cut state. Win32 only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetState() const;
|
||||
|
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ class wxLogWindow : public wxLogInterposer
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the log frame window and starts collecting the messages in it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The parent window for the log frame, may be @NULL
|
||||
@param title
|
||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
exits).
|
||||
Return @true from here to allow the frame to close, @false to
|
||||
prevent this from happening.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnFrameDelete()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool OnFrameClose(wxFrame frame);
|
||||
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Add the @a mask to the list of allowed masks for
|
||||
wxLogTrace().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see RemoveTraceMask(), GetTraceMasks()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddTraceMask(const wxString& mask);
|
||||
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes all trace masks previously set with
|
||||
AddTraceMask().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see RemoveTraceMask()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ClearTraceMasks();
|
||||
@@ -417,12 +417,12 @@ public:
|
||||
current mask while a message using string mask will be logged simply if the
|
||||
mask had been added before to the list of allowed ones.
|
||||
For example,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will do something only if the current trace mask contains both
|
||||
@c wxTraceRefCount and @c wxTraceOle, but
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will log the message if it was preceded by
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Using string masks is simpler and allows to easily add custom ones, so this is
|
||||
the preferred way of working with trace messages. The integer trace mask is
|
||||
kept for compatibility and for additional (but very rarely needed) flexibility
|
||||
@@ -442,29 +442,29 @@ public:
|
||||
window on the corresponding error message. If you wish to enable it, please use
|
||||
SetTimestamp() explicitly.
|
||||
AddTraceMask()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveTraceMask()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ClearTraceMasks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTraceMasks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsAllowedTraceMask()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetVerbose()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVerbose()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTimestamp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTimestamp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTraceMask()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTraceMask()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRepetitionCounting()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRepetitionCounting()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Flushes the current log target if any, does nothing if there is none.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Flush()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void FlushActive();
|
||||
@@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently allowed list of string trace masks.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddTraceMask().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static const wxArrayString GetTraceMasks();
|
||||
@@ -564,15 +564,15 @@ public:
|
||||
only useful when the application is terminating and shouldn't be used in other
|
||||
situations because it may easily lead to a loss of messages.
|
||||
OnLog()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetActiveTarget()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetActiveTarget()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DontCreateOnDemand()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Suspend()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Resume()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Flush() shows them all and clears the buffer contents.
|
||||
This function doesn't do anything if the buffer is already empty.
|
||||
Flush()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FlushActive()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ public:
|
||||
logging immediately without waiting for Flush() to be
|
||||
called (the standard GUI log target only shows the log dialog when it is
|
||||
flushed, so Suspend() works as expected with it).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Resume(), wxLogNull
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Suspend();
|
||||
|
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator from unsigned long long. The sign bit will be copied too.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong& operator operator=(const wxULongLong& ll);
|
||||
|
@@ -24,15 +24,15 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The window style. Currently unused.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The second style of constructor is called within
|
||||
wxMDIParentFrame::OnCreateClient.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxMDIParentFrame::wxMDIParentFrame, wxMDIParentFrame::OnCreateClient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow();
|
||||
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent. This should be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -131,12 +131,12 @@ public:
|
||||
item,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks During the construction of the frame, the client window will be
|
||||
created. To use a different class from
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow, override
|
||||
OnCreateClient().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), OnCreateClient()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMDIParentFrame();
|
||||
@@ -155,28 +155,28 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Activates the MDI child following the currently active one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ActivatePrevious()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ActivateNext();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Activates the MDI child preceding the currently active one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ActivateNext()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ActivatePrevious();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Arranges any iconized (minimized) MDI child windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Cascade(), Tile()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArrangeIcons();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Arranges the MDI child windows in a cascade.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Tile(), ArrangeIcons()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Cascade();
|
||||
@@ -199,16 +199,16 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This gets the size of the frame 'client area' in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Receives the client width in pixels.
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
Receives the client height in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The client area is the area which may be drawn on by the
|
||||
programmer, excluding title bar, border, status bar,
|
||||
and toolbar if present.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetToolBar(), SetToolBar(),
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -216,14 +216,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the client window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnCreateClient()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow* GetClientWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the window being used as the toolbar for this frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
@@ -242,11 +242,11 @@ public:
|
||||
called,
|
||||
due to the way C++ treats virtual functions called from constructors. For
|
||||
example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You might wish to derive from wxMDIClientWindow in order to
|
||||
implement different erase behaviour, for example, such
|
||||
as painting a bitmap on the background.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientWindow(), wxMDIClientWindow
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxMDIClientWindow* OnCreateClient();
|
||||
@@ -255,14 +255,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the window to be used as a toolbar for this
|
||||
MDI parent window. It saves the application having to manage the positioning
|
||||
of the toolbar MDI client window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param toolbar
|
||||
Toolbar to manage.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks When the frame is resized, the toolbar is resized to be the
|
||||
width of the frame client area, and the toolbar height
|
||||
is kept the same.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetToolBar(), GetClientSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetToolBar(wxWindow* toolbar);
|
||||
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent. This should not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -353,9 +353,9 @@ public:
|
||||
item,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks None.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMDIChildFrame();
|
||||
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Activates this MDI child frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Maximize(), Restore()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Activate();
|
||||
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Maximizes this MDI child frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Activate(), Restore()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Maximize(bool maximize);
|
||||
|
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
,
|
||||
wxPoint&
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos = wxDefaultPosition,
|
||||
const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
|
||||
long style = 0,
|
||||
@@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ public:
|
||||
const wxValidatorvalidator = wxDefaultValidator,
|
||||
const wxString& name = wxPanelNameStr
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor that calls Create. You may prefer to call Create directly to check
|
||||
to see if wxMediaCtrl is available on the system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
parent
|
||||
parent of this control. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -90,35 +90,35 @@ public:
|
||||
name of the backend class to
|
||||
Create().
|
||||
The following are valid backend identifiers -
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIABACKEND_DIRECTSHOW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Use ActiveMovie/DirectShow. Uses the native ActiveMovie
|
||||
(I.E. DirectShow) control. Default backend on Windows and
|
||||
supported by nearly all Windows versions, even some
|
||||
Windows CE versions. May display a windows media player
|
||||
logo while inactive.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIABACKEND_QUICKTIME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Use QuickTime. Mac Only.
|
||||
WARNING: May not working correctly embedded in a wxNotebook.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIABACKEND_GSTREAMER
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Use GStreamer. Unix Only. Requires GStreamer 0.8 along
|
||||
with at the very least the xvimagesink, xoverlay, and
|
||||
gst-play modules of gstreamer to function. You need the correct
|
||||
modules to play the relavant files, for example the mad module
|
||||
to play mp3s, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIABACKEND_WMP10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Uses Windows Media Player 10 (Windows only) - works on mobile
|
||||
machines with Windows Media Player 10 and desktop machines with
|
||||
either Windows Media Player 9 or 10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that other backends such as wxMEDIABACKEND_MCI can now be
|
||||
found at wxCode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
,
|
||||
wxPoint&
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos = wxDefaultPosition,
|
||||
const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
|
||||
long style = 0,
|
||||
@@ -135,13 +135,13 @@ public:
|
||||
const wxValidatorvalidator = wxDefaultValidator,
|
||||
const wxString& name = wxPanelNameStr
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates this control. Returns @false if it can't load the movie located at
|
||||
fileName or it cannot load one of its native backends.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you specify a file to open via fileName and you don't specify a backend to
|
||||
use, wxMediaCtrl tries each of its backends until one that can render the path referred to by fileName can be found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
parent
|
||||
parent of this control. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -196,17 +196,17 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Obtains the state the playback of the media is in -
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIASTATE_STOPPED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The movie has stopped.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIASTATE_PAUSED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The movie is paused.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIASTATE_PLAYING
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The movie is currently playing.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMediaCtrlState GetState();
|
||||
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ public:
|
||||
can choose to veto the event, preventing the stream from actually
|
||||
stopping.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When wxMediaCtrl stops, either by the EVT_MEDIA_STOP not being
|
||||
vetoed, or by manually calling
|
||||
Stop(), where it actually
|
||||
@@ -341,24 +341,24 @@ public:
|
||||
calling the function with default parameters tells wxMediaCtrl to use the
|
||||
default controls provided by the toolkit. The function takes a
|
||||
@c wxMediaCtrlPlayerControls enumeration as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIACTRLPLAYERCONTROLS_NONE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
No controls. return wxMediaCtrl to it's default state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIACTRLPLAYERCONTROLS_STEP
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Step controls like fastfoward, step one frame etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIACTRLPLAYERCONTROLS_VOLUME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Volume controls like the speaker icon, volume slider, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxMEDIACTRLPLAYERCONTROLS_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default controls for the toolkit. Currently a typedef for
|
||||
wxMEDIACTRLPLAYERCONTROLS_STEP and wxMEDIACTRLPLAYERCONTROLS_VOLUME.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For more see @ref overview_playercontrolswxmediactrl "Player controls".
|
||||
Currently
|
||||
only implemented on the QuickTime and DirectShow backends. The function
|
||||
|
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Checks the memory blocks for errors, starting from the currently set
|
||||
checkpoint.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the number of errors, so a value of zero represents
|
||||
success. Returns -1 if an error was detected that
|
||||
prevents further checking.
|
||||
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Performs a memory dump from the currently set checkpoint, writing to the
|
||||
current debug stream. Calls the @b Dump member function for each wxObject
|
||||
derived instance.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the function succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Dump();
|
||||
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the memory allocator checks all previous memory blocks for
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
By default, this is @false since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCheckPrevious()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCheckPrevious();
|
||||
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ public:
|
||||
delete
|
||||
operators store or use information about memory allocation. Otherwise,
|
||||
a straight malloc and free will be performed by these operators.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDebugMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetDebugMode();
|
||||
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ public:
|
||||
application
|
||||
specify a value other than one.
|
||||
This is obsolete, replaced by wxLog functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLevel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetLevel();
|
||||
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the output stream associated with the debug context.
|
||||
This is obsolete, replaced by wxLog functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStream()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
ostream GetStream();
|
||||
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if there is a stream currently associated
|
||||
with the debug context.
|
||||
This is obsolete, replaced by wxLog functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStream(), GetStream()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasStream();
|
||||
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Prints a list of the classes declared in this application, giving derivation
|
||||
and whether instances of this class can be dynamically created.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see PrintStatistics()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool PrintClasses();
|
||||
@@ -138,12 +138,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Performs a statistics analysis from the currently set checkpoint, writing
|
||||
to the current debug stream. The number of object and non-object
|
||||
allocations is printed, together with the total size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param detailed
|
||||
If @true, the function will also print how many
|
||||
objects of each class have been allocated, and the space taken by
|
||||
these class instances.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see PrintStatistics()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool PrintStatistics(bool detailed = true);
|
||||
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tells the memory allocator to check all previous memory blocks for errors.
|
||||
By default, this is @false since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCheckPrevious()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCheckPrevious(bool check);
|
||||
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Sets the current checkpoint: Dump and PrintStatistics operations will
|
||||
be performed from this point on. This allows you to ignore allocations
|
||||
that have been performed up to this point.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param all
|
||||
If @true, the checkpoint is reset to include all
|
||||
memory allocations since the program started.
|
||||
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ public:
|
||||
is deallocated with the same value of debug mode. Otherwise, the
|
||||
delete operator might try to look for memory information that does not
|
||||
exist.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDebugMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDebugMode(bool debug);
|
||||
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public:
|
||||
application
|
||||
specify a value other than one.
|
||||
This is obsolete, replaced by wxLog functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLevel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLevel(int level);
|
||||
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This operation flushes and deletes the existing stream (and stream buffer if
|
||||
any).
|
||||
This is obsolete, replaced by wxLog functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
Stream to associate with the debug context. Do not set this to @NULL.
|
||||
@param streamBuf
|
||||
|
212
interface/menu.h
212
interface/menu.h
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Construct a menu bar from arrays of menus and titles.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The number of menus.
|
||||
@param menus
|
||||
@@ -48,26 +48,26 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds the item to the end of the menu bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param menu
|
||||
The menu to add. Do not deallocate this menu after calling Append.
|
||||
@param title
|
||||
The title of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true on success, @false if an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Append(wxMenu* menu, const wxString& title);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Checks or unchecks a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param check
|
||||
If @true, checks the menu item, otherwise the item is unchecked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Only use this when the menu bar has been associated with a
|
||||
frame; otherwise, use the wxMenu equivalent call.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -75,12 +75,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Enables or disables (greys out) a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param enable
|
||||
@true to enable the item, @false to disable it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Only use this when the menu bar has been associated with a
|
||||
frame; otherwise, use the wxMenu equivalent call.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -88,24 +88,24 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Enables or disables a whole menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The position of the menu, starting from zero.
|
||||
@param enable
|
||||
@true to enable the menu, @false to disable it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Only use this when the menu bar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableTop(int pos, const bool enable);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Finds the menu item object associated with the given menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
Menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param menu
|
||||
If not @NULL, menu will get set to the associated menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The found menu item object, or @NULL if one was not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* FindItem(int id, wxMenu menu = NULL) const;
|
||||
@@ -120,14 +120,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Finds the menu item id for a menu name/menu item string pair.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param menuString
|
||||
Menu title to find.
|
||||
@param itemString
|
||||
Item to find.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The menu item identifier, or wxNOT_FOUND if none was found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Any special menu codes are stripped out of source and target
|
||||
strings before matching.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -136,26 +136,26 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the help string associated with the menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The help string, or the empty string if there was no help string
|
||||
or the menu item was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHelpString()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetHelpString(int id) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the label associated with a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The menu item label, or the empty string if the item was not
|
||||
found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabel(int id) const;
|
||||
@@ -164,14 +164,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the label of a top-level menu. Note that the returned string does not
|
||||
include the accelerator characters which could have been specified in the menu
|
||||
title string during its construction.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
Position of the menu on the menu bar, starting from zero.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The menu label, or the empty string if the menu was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLabelTop()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabelTop(int pos) const;
|
||||
@@ -190,14 +190,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the label of a top-level menu. Note that the returned string
|
||||
includes the accelerator characters that have been specified in the menu
|
||||
title string during its construction.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
Position of the menu on the menu bar, starting from zero.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The menu label, or the empty string if the menu was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMenuLabelText(), SetMenuLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetMenuLabel(int pos) const;
|
||||
@@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the label of a top-level menu. Note that the returned string does not
|
||||
include any accelerator characters that may have been specified in the menu
|
||||
title string during its construction.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
Position of the menu on the menu bar, starting from zero.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The menu label, or the empty string if the menu was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMenuLabel(), SetMenuLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetMenuLabelText(int pos) const;
|
||||
@@ -223,36 +223,36 @@ public:
|
||||
position 0 will insert it in the very beginning of it, inserting at position
|
||||
GetMenuCount() is the same as calling
|
||||
Append().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The position of the new menu in the menu bar
|
||||
@param menu
|
||||
The menu to add. wxMenuBar owns the menu and will free it.
|
||||
@param title
|
||||
The title of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true on success, @false if an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Insert(size_t pos, wxMenu* menu, const wxString& title);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines whether an item is checked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the item was found and is checked, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsChecked(int id) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines whether an item is enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the item was found and is enabled, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEnabled(int id) const;
|
||||
@@ -267,76 +267,76 @@ public:
|
||||
responsible for deleting it. This function may be used together with
|
||||
Insert() to change the menubar
|
||||
dynamically.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Replace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenu* Remove(size_t pos);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the menu at the given position with another one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The position of the new menu in the menu bar
|
||||
@param menu
|
||||
The menu to add.
|
||||
@param title
|
||||
The title of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The menu which was previously at position pos. The caller is
|
||||
responsible for deleting it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert(), Remove()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenu* Replace(size_t pos, wxMenu* menu, const wxString& title);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the help string associated with a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
Menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param helpString
|
||||
Help string to associate with the menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHelpString()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetHelpString(int id, const wxString& helpString);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label of a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
Menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param label
|
||||
Menu item label.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLabel(int id, const wxString& label);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label of a top-level menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The position of a menu on the menu bar, starting from zero.
|
||||
@param label
|
||||
The menu label.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLabelTop()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLabelTop(int pos, const wxString& label);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label of a top-level menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The position of a menu on the menu bar, starting from zero.
|
||||
@param label
|
||||
The menu label.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use only after the menubar has been associated with a frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMenuLabel(int pos, const wxString& label);
|
||||
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructs a wxMenu object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
If set to wxMENU_TEAROFF, the menu will be detachable (wxGTK only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ public:
|
||||
because it may be used for both items (including separators) and submenus and
|
||||
because you can also specify various extra properties of a menu item this way,
|
||||
such as bitmaps and fonts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu command identifier.
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
@@ -436,10 +436,10 @@ public:
|
||||
@param menuItem
|
||||
A menuitem object. It will be owned by the wxMenu object after this function
|
||||
is called, so do not delete it yourself.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This command can be used after the menu has been shown, as well
|
||||
as on initial creation of a menu or menubar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AppendSeparator(), AppendCheckItem(), AppendRadioItem(),
|
||||
AppendSubMenu(), Insert(), SetLabel(),
|
||||
GetHelpString(), SetHelpString(), wxMenuItem
|
||||
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a checkable item to the end of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append(), InsertCheckItem()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* AppendCheckItem(int id, const wxString& item,
|
||||
@@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Adds a radio item to the end of the menu. All consequent radio items form a
|
||||
group and when an item in the group is checked, all the others are
|
||||
automatically unchecked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append(), InsertRadioItem()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* AppendRadioItem(int id, const wxString& item,
|
||||
@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a separator to the end of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append(), InsertSeparator()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* AppendSeparator();
|
||||
@@ -494,12 +494,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Checks or unchecks the menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param check
|
||||
If @true, the item will be checked, otherwise it will be unchecked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsChecked()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Check(int id, const bool check);
|
||||
@@ -509,12 +509,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Deletes the menu item from the menu. If the item is a submenu, it will
|
||||
@b not be deleted. Use Destroy() if you want to
|
||||
delete a submenu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
Id of the menu item to be deleted.
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
Menu item to be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see FindItem(), Destroy(), Remove()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Delete(int id);
|
||||
@@ -526,12 +526,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Deletes the menu item from the menu. If the item is a submenu, it will
|
||||
be deleted. Use Remove() if you want to keep the submenu
|
||||
(for example, to reuse it later).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
Id of the menu item to be deleted.
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
Menu item to be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see FindItem(), Deletes(), Remove()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Destroy(int id);
|
||||
@@ -540,12 +540,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Enables or disables (greys out) a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param enable
|
||||
@true to enable the menu item, @false to disable it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Enable(int id, const bool enable);
|
||||
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Finds the menu item object associated with the given menu item identifier and,
|
||||
optionally, the (sub)menu it belongs to.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param itemString
|
||||
Menu item string to find.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -562,10 +562,10 @@ public:
|
||||
@param menu
|
||||
If the pointer is not @NULL, it will be filled with the item's
|
||||
parent menu (if the item was found)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns First form: menu item identifier, or wxNOT_FOUND if none is
|
||||
found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Any special menu codes are stripped out of source and target
|
||||
strings before matching.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -580,25 +580,25 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the help string associated with a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The help string, or the empty string if there is no help string
|
||||
or the item was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHelpString(), Append()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetHelpString(int id) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a menu item label.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The item label, or the empty string if the item was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLabelText(), SetLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabel(int id) const;
|
||||
@@ -606,12 +606,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a menu item label, without any of the original mnemonics and
|
||||
accelerators.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The item label, or the empty string if the item was not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLabel(), SetLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabelText(int id) const;
|
||||
@@ -629,10 +629,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the title of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This is relevant only to popup menus, use
|
||||
wxMenuBar::GetMenuLabel for the menus in the menubar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTitle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetTitle() const;
|
||||
@@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Inserts the given @a item before the position @e pos. Inserting the item
|
||||
at position GetMenuItemCount() is the same
|
||||
as appending it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append(), Prepend()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* Insert(size_t pos, wxMenuItem* item);
|
||||
@@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a checkable item at the given position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert(), AppendCheckItem()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* InsertCheckItem(size_t pos, int id,
|
||||
@@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a radio item at the given position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert(), AppendRadioItem()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* InsertRadioItem(size_t pos, int id,
|
||||
@@ -672,31 +672,31 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a separator at the given position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert(), AppendSeparator()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* InsertSeparator(size_t pos);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines whether a menu item is checked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the menu item is checked, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Check()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsChecked(int id) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines whether a menu item is enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the menu item is enabled, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Enable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEnabled(int id) const;
|
||||
@@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts the given @a item at position 0, i.e. before all the other
|
||||
existing items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append(), Insert()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* Prepend(wxMenuItem* item);
|
||||
@@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a checkable item at position 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Prepend(), AppendCheckItem()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* PrependCheckItem(int id, const wxString& item,
|
||||
@@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a radio item at position 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Prepend(), AppendRadioItem()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* PrependRadioItem(int id, const wxString& item,
|
||||
@@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a separator at position 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Prepend(), AppendSeparator()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* PrependSeparator();
|
||||
@@ -742,12 +742,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Removes the menu item from the menu but doesn't delete the associated C++
|
||||
object. This allows to reuse the same item later by adding it back to the menu
|
||||
(especially useful with submenus).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier of the menu item to remove.
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
The menu item to remove.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The item which was detached from the menu.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuItem* Remove(int id);
|
||||
@@ -756,37 +756,37 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets an item's help string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param helpString
|
||||
The help string to set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHelpString()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetHelpString(int id, const wxString& helpString);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label of a menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The menu item identifier.
|
||||
@param label
|
||||
The menu item label to set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Append(), GetLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLabel(int id, const wxString& label);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the title of the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param title
|
||||
The title to set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This is relevant only to popup menus, use
|
||||
wxMenuBar::SetLabelTop for the menus in the menubar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTitle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTitle(const wxString& title);
|
||||
|
@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ public:
|
||||
the menu item is selected) in this parameter.
|
||||
Finally note that you can e.g. use a stock menu label without using its stock
|
||||
help string:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
that is, stock properties are set independently one from the other.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parentMenu
|
||||
Menu that the menu item belongs to.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text associated with the menu item including any accelerator
|
||||
characters that were passed to the constructor or SetItemLabel.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetItemLabelText(), GetLabelText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetItemLabel() const;
|
||||
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text associated with the menu item, without any accelerator
|
||||
characters.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetItemLabel(), GetLabelText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetItemLabelText() const;
|
||||
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the text associated with the menu item without any accelerator
|
||||
characters it might contain.
|
||||
This function is deprecated in favour of GetItemLabelText().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetText(), GetLabelFromText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabel() const;
|
||||
@@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Strips all accelerator characters and mnemonics from the given @e text.
|
||||
For example,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will return just @c "Hello".
|
||||
This function is deprecated; please use GetLabelText() instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetText(), GetLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetLabelFromText(const wxString& text);
|
||||
@@ -152,9 +152,9 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Strips all accelerator characters and mnemonics from the given @e text.
|
||||
For example,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will return just @c "Hello".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetItemLabelText(), GetItemLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetLabelText(const wxString& text);
|
||||
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the text associated with the menu item, such as it was passed to the
|
||||
wxMenuItem constructor, i.e. with any accelerator characters it may contain.
|
||||
This function is deprecated in favour of GetItemLabel().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLabel(), GetLabelFromText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetText() const;
|
||||
|
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
||||
NB: You won't normally need to use more than one wxMimeTypesManager object in a
|
||||
program.
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxMimeTypesManager
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxMimeTypesManager
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -101,9 +101,9 @@ public:
|
||||
default ones which are loaded automatically) containing MIME
|
||||
information in either mailcap(5) or mime.types(5) format.
|
||||
ReadMailcap()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ReadMimeTypes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AddFallbacks()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the function is successful, it returns a pointer to the wxFileType object
|
||||
which @b must be deleted by the caller, otherwise @NULL will be returned.
|
||||
GetFileTypeFromMimeType()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFileTypeFromExtension()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -213,23 +213,23 @@ public:
|
||||
usage but may be also used by the application directly if, for example, you want
|
||||
to use some non-default command to open the file.
|
||||
The function replaces all occurrences of
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
format specification
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
with
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%s
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the full file name
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%t
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the MIME type
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%{param}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the value of the parameter @e param
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
using the MessageParameters object you pass to it.
|
||||
If there is no '%s' in the command string (and the string is not empty), it is
|
||||
assumed that the command reads the data on stdin and so the effect is the same
|
||||
@@ -332,10 +332,10 @@ public:
|
||||
there are no other parameters. If you wish to supply additional parameters, you
|
||||
must derive your own class from MessageParameters and override GetParamValue()
|
||||
function, for example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Now you only need to create an object of this class and pass it to, for example,
|
||||
GetOpenCommand() like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Windows: As only the file name is used by the program associated with the
|
||||
given extension anyhow (but no other message parameters), there is no need to
|
||||
ever derive from MessageParameters class for a Windows-only program.
|
||||
|
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent. This may be @NULL. If it is non-@NULL, the frame will
|
||||
always be displayed on top of the parent window on Windows.
|
||||
@@ -79,9 +79,9 @@ public:
|
||||
item,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The frame behaves like a normal frame on non-Windows platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMiniFrame();
|
||||
|
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public:
|
||||
of the module needed by CLASSINFO(), however errors are
|
||||
not detected until run-time, instead of compile-time, then.
|
||||
Note that circular dependencies are detected and result in a fatal error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dep
|
||||
The class information object for the dependent module.
|
||||
@param classname
|
||||
|
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ class wxMessageDialog : public wxDialog
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
@@ -32,50 +32,50 @@ public:
|
||||
The dialog caption.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
A dialog style (bitlist) containing flags chosen from the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxOK
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Show an OK button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCANCEL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Show a Cancel button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxYES_NO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Show Yes and No buttons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxYES_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Used with wxYES_NO, makes Yes button the default - which is the default
|
||||
behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxNO_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Used with wxYES_NO, makes No button the default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxICON_EXCLAMATION
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Shows an exclamation mark icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxICON_HAND
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Shows an error icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxICON_ERROR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Shows an error icon - the same as wxICON_HAND.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxICON_QUESTION
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Shows a question mark icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxICON_INFORMATION
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Shows an information (i) icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxSTAY_ON_TOP
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The message box stays on top of all other window, even those of the other
|
||||
applications (Windows only).
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
|
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Constructs a notebook control.
|
||||
Note that sometimes you can reduce flicker by passing the wxCLIP_CHILDREN
|
||||
window style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The parent window. Must be non-@NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a new page.
|
||||
The call to this function may generate the page changing events.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param page
|
||||
Specifies the new page.
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
@@ -161,11 +161,11 @@ public:
|
||||
Specifies whether the page should be selected.
|
||||
@param imageId
|
||||
Specifies the optional image index for the new page.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Do not delete the page, it will be deleted by the notebook.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see InsertPage()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AddPage(wxNotebookPage* page, const wxString& text,
|
||||
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the image list for the page control and takes ownership of
|
||||
the list.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxImageList, SetImageList()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AssignImageList(wxImageList* imageList);
|
||||
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the associated image list.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxImageList, SetImageList()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImageList* GetImageList() const;
|
||||
@@ -274,70 +274,70 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the index of the tab at the specified position or @c wxNOT_FOUND
|
||||
if none. If @a flags parameter is non-@NULL, the position of the point
|
||||
inside the tab is returned as well.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pt
|
||||
Specifies the point for the hit test.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
Return value for detailed information. One of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBK_HITTEST_NOWHERE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There was no tab under this point.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBK_HITTEST_ONICON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The point was over an icon (currently wxMSW only).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBK_HITTEST_ONLABEL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The point was over a label (currently wxMSW only).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBK_HITTEST_ONITEM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The point was over an item, but not on the label or icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBK_HITTEST_ONPAGE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The point was over a currently selected page, not over any tab. Note that
|
||||
this flag is present only if wxNOT_FOUND is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the zero-based tab index or wxNOT_FOUND if there is no
|
||||
tab is at the specified position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a new page at the specified position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
Specifies the position for the new page.
|
||||
@param page
|
||||
@@ -356,11 +356,11 @@ public:
|
||||
Specifies whether the page should be selected.
|
||||
@param imageId
|
||||
Specifies the optional image index for the new page.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Do not delete the page, it will be deleted by the notebook.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddPage()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertPage(size_t index, wxNotebookPage* page,
|
||||
@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
An event handler function, called when the page selection is changed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxNotebookEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnSelChange(wxNotebookEvent& event);
|
||||
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the image list for the page control. It does not take
|
||||
ownership of the image list, you must delete it yourself.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxImageList, AssignImageList()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetImageList(wxImageList* imageList);
|
||||
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The call to this function generates the page changing events.
|
||||
This function is deprecated and should not be used in new code. Please use the
|
||||
ChangeSelection() function instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int SetSelection(size_t page);
|
||||
|
@@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ public:
|
||||
memory states.
|
||||
This function is only defined in debug build and doesn't exist at all if
|
||||
@c __WXDEBUG__ is not defined.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
Stream on which to output dump information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Currently wxWidgets does not define Dump for derived classes,
|
||||
but programmers may wish to use it for their own
|
||||
applications. Be sure to call the Dump member of the
|
||||
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @b m_refData pointer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Ref(), UnRef(), wxObject::m_refData, SetRefData(),
|
||||
wxObjectRefData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -136,11 +136,11 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines whether this class is a subclass of (or the same class as)
|
||||
the given class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param info
|
||||
A pointer to a class information object, which may be obtained
|
||||
by using the CLASSINFO macro.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the class represented by info is the same class as this
|
||||
one or is derived from it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -156,14 +156,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Makes this object refer to the data in @e clone.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param clone
|
||||
The object to 'clone'.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks First this function calls UnRef() on itself to decrement
|
||||
(and perhaps free) the data it is currently referring
|
||||
to.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see UnRef(), wxObject::m_refData, SetRefData(),
|
||||
GetRefData(), wxObjectRefData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the @b m_refData pointer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Ref(), UnRef(), wxObject::m_refData, GetRefData(),
|
||||
wxObjectRefData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Decrements the reference count in the associated data, and if it is zero,
|
||||
deletes the data.
|
||||
The @b m_refData member is set to @NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Ref(), wxObject::m_refData, SetRefData(),
|
||||
GetRefData(), wxObjectRefData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxObjectRefData* m_refData
|
||||
Pointer to an object which is the object's reference-counted data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Ref(), UnRef(), SetRefData(),
|
||||
GetRefData(), wxObjectRefData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a owner-drawn combobox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxOwnerDrawnComboBox();
|
||||
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The base class version implements a reasonable default behaviour which consists
|
||||
in drawing the selected item with the standard background colour and drawing a
|
||||
border around the item if it is either selected or current.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks flags has the same meaning as with OnDrawItem.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnDrawBackground(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect, int item,
|
||||
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The derived class may implement this function to actually draw the item
|
||||
with the given index on the provided DC. If function is not implemented,
|
||||
the item text is simply drawn, as if the control was a normal combobox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dc
|
||||
The device context to use for drawing
|
||||
@param rect
|
||||
|
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a palette from arrays of size @e n, one for each
|
||||
red, blue or green component.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param palette
|
||||
A pointer or reference to the palette to copy.
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
An array of green values.
|
||||
@param blue
|
||||
An array of blue values.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPalette();
|
||||
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a palette from arrays of size @e n, one for each
|
||||
red, blue or green component.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The number of indices in the palette.
|
||||
@param red
|
||||
@@ -78,9 +78,9 @@ public:
|
||||
An array of green values.
|
||||
@param blue
|
||||
An array of blue values.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the creation was successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxPalette()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Create(int n, const unsigned char* red,
|
||||
@@ -94,16 +94,16 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pixel value (index into the palette) for the given RGB values.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param red
|
||||
Red value.
|
||||
@param green
|
||||
Green value.
|
||||
@param blue
|
||||
Blue value.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The nearest palette index or wxNOT_FOUND for unexpected errors.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetRGB()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPixel(unsigned char red, unsigned char green,
|
||||
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns RGB values for a given palette index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pixel
|
||||
The palette index.
|
||||
@param red
|
||||
@@ -120,9 +120,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Receives the green value.
|
||||
@param blue
|
||||
Receives the blue value.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation was successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPixel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetRGB(int pixel, const unsigned char* red,
|
||||
|
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Used to associate a name with the window,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual dialog boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPanel();
|
||||
@@ -91,24 +91,24 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sends a wxInitDialogEvent, which
|
||||
in turn transfers data to the dialog via validators.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxInitDialogEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitDialog();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The default handler for wxEVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
The colour change event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Changes the panel's colour to conform to the current settings
|
||||
(Windows only). Add an event table entry for your panel
|
||||
class if you wish the behaviour to be different (such
|
||||
as keeping a user-defined background colour). If you do
|
||||
override this function, call wxEvent::Skip to propagate
|
||||
the notification to child windows and controls.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxSysColourChangedEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnSysColourChanged(wxSysColourChangedEvent& event);
|
||||
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the focus and TAB logic for controls which usually have child controls.
|
||||
In practice, if you call this method and the control has at least
|
||||
one child window, the focus will be given to the child window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFocusEvent, wxWindow::SetFocus
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetFocus();
|
||||
|
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the OS version is at least @c major.minor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetOSMajorVersion(), GetOSMinorVersion(),
|
||||
CheckToolkitVersion()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the toolkit version is at least @c major.minor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetToolkitMajorVersion(),
|
||||
GetToolkitMinorVersion(), CheckOSVersion()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the run-time major version of the OS associated with this
|
||||
wxPlatformInfo instance.
|
||||
See wxGetOsVersion() for more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CheckOSVersion()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOSMajorVersion() const;
|
||||
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the run-time minor version of the OS associated with this
|
||||
wxPlatformInfo instance.
|
||||
See wxGetOsVersion() for more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CheckOSVersion()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOSMinorVersion() const;
|
||||
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that if GetPortId() returns wxPORT_BASE, then this value is zero (unless
|
||||
externally modified with wxPlatformInfo::SetToolkitVersion); that is, no native toolkit is in use.
|
||||
See wxAppTraits::GetToolkitVersion for more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CheckToolkitVersion()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetToolkitMajorVersion() const;
|
||||
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that if GetPortId() returns wxPORT_BASE, then this value is zero (unless
|
||||
externally modified with wxPlatformInfo::SetToolkitVersion); that is, no native toolkit is in use.
|
||||
See wxAppTraits::GetToolkitVersion for more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CheckToolkitVersion()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetToolkitMinorVersion() const;
|
||||
|
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator ==(const wxPosition& p) const;
|
||||
const bool operator !=(const wxPosition& p) const;
|
||||
|
@@ -52,25 +52,25 @@ public:
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
The buttons parameter may be a combination of the following, using the bitwise
|
||||
'or' operator.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPREVIEW_PRINT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create a print button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPREVIEW_NEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create a next page button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPREVIEW_PREVIOUS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create a previous page button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPREVIEW_ZOOM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create a zoom control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPREVIEW_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Equivalent to a combination of wxPREVIEW_PREVIOUS, wxPREVIEW_NEXT and
|
||||
wxPREVIEW_ZOOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Pass an optional pointer to a block of print
|
||||
dialog data, which will be copied to the printer object's local data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxPrintDialogData, wxPrintData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPrinter(wxPrintDialogData* data = NULL);
|
||||
@@ -375,17 +375,17 @@ public:
|
||||
wxPrintPreview::Print. These functions
|
||||
set last error to @b wxPRINTER_NO_ERROR if no error happened.
|
||||
Returned value is one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPRINTER_NO_ERROR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
No error happened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPRINTER_CANCELLED
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The user cancelled printing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPRINTER_ERROR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There was an error during printing.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxPrinterError GetLastError();
|
||||
|
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Pass a parent window, and optionally a pointer to a block of print
|
||||
data, which will be copied to the print dialog's print data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxPrintDialogData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPrintDialog(wxWindow* parent, wxPrintDialogData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ public:
|
||||
value of @c wxPROCESS_DEFAULT or @c wxPROCESS_REDIRECT. Specifying the
|
||||
former value has no particular effect while using the latter one is equivalent
|
||||
to calling Redirect().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The event handler parent.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the given process exists in the system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Kill(), @ref overview_sampleexec "Exec sample"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool Exists(int pid);
|
||||
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if there is data to be read on the child process standard
|
||||
error stream.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsInputAvailable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsErrorAvailable() const;
|
||||
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
||||
polling-based code waiting for a better mechanism in future wxWidgets versions.
|
||||
See the @ref overview_sampleexec "exec sample" for an example of using this
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsInputOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsInputAvailable() const;
|
||||
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Send the specified signal to the given process. Possible signal values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxSIGNONE, @c wxSIGKILL and @c wxSIGTERM have the same meaning
|
||||
under both Unix and Windows but all the other signals are equivalent to
|
||||
@c wxSIGTERM under Windows.
|
||||
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ public:
|
||||
process will be killed too. Note that under Unix, for wxKILL_CHILDREN
|
||||
to work you should have created the process passing wxEXEC_MAKE_GROUP_LEADER.
|
||||
Returns the element of @c wxKillError enum:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Exists(), wxKill(), @ref overview_sampleexec "Exec sample"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxKillError Kill(int pid, wxSignal signal = wxSIGNONE,
|
||||
@@ -170,10 +170,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
It is called when the process with the pid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pid finishes.
|
||||
It raises a wxWidgets event when it isn't overridden.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
pid
|
||||
The pid of the process which has just terminated.
|
||||
@param status
|
||||
@@ -191,15 +191,15 @@ public:
|
||||
object will be destroyed automatically when the child process terminates. This
|
||||
does mean that the child process should be told to quit before the main program
|
||||
exits to avoid memory leaks.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param cmd
|
||||
The command to execute, including optional arguments.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
The flags to pass to wxExecute.
|
||||
NOTE: wxEXEC_SYNC should not be used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to new wxProcess object or @NULL on error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxExecute()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxProcess* Open(const wxString& cmd,
|
||||
|
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Reference in New Issue
Block a user